Electrical Operation Manual Handbook

Electrical Operation Manual
Contents
Chapter I Primary Wiring System ........................................................................................................... 7
1 Electrical Primary Wiring ......................................................................................................... 7
1.1
Main Electrical Primary Wiring ............................................................................... 7
1.2
Auxiliary Power Connection ..................................................................................... 7
2 Operation Modes of Systems ....................................................................................................... 8
2.1 150KV System.................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Auxiliary Power System.................................................................................................. 10
Chapter II Generator............................................................................................................................... 11
1 Equipment Specifications .......................................................................................................... 11
1.1 Generator Nameplate Parameters ................................................................................. 11
1.2 Design Specification of Generator ................................................................................. 11
1.3 Technical Characteristics of Generator......................................................................... 12
1.4 Basic Technical Requirements........................................................................................ 13
1.5 Structure of Generator Body .......................................................................................... 13
1.6 Cooling System of Generator ......................................................................................... 15
1.7 Generator Excitation System ......................................................................................... 17
2 Operation and Maintenance...................................................................................................... 23
2.1 Check and Preparation Work before Steam Turbine Generator Startup .................. 23
2.2 Workings after Impulse Starting of Steam Turbine ..................................................... 25
2.3 Operations........................................................................................................................ 25
2.4 Normal Operation Mode of Generator ......................................................................... 27
2.5 Monitoring in Operation ................................................................................................ 29
2.6 Parallel Off and Shutdown of Generator ...................................................................... 31
2.7 Maintenance after Shutdown ......................................................................................... 33
2.8 Accident Handling ........................................................................................................... 35
1 Equipment Specifications .......................................................................................................... 42
1.1 Equipment Technical Parameters of Main Transformer ............................................. 42
1.2 Equipment Technical Parameters of HV Auxiliary Power Transformer ................... 42
1.3 Equipment Technical Parameters of Startup Standby Transformer .......................... 43
1.4 Technical Parameters of LV Auxiliary Power Transformer ........................................ 44
2 Manual for Transformer Operation ......................................................................................... 44
2.1
Manual for Normal Operation Temperatures of Transformers........................... 45
2.2
Manual for Transformer Insulations ...................................................................... 45
2.3
Manual for Normal Operation Voltage of Transformer ....................................... 46
2.4
Operation Instructions for Voltage Regulating Device ......................................... 46
2.5
Parallel Operation of Transformers ....................................................................... 47
2.6
Manual for Overload Operation of Transformer .................................................. 47
2.7
Operation of Transformer Cooling Device ............................................................. 48
2.8 Operation Manual of Transformer Gas Protection ...................................................... 49
2.9 Manual for Neutral Point Earthing of Startup Standby Transformer ....................... 50
2.10
Neutral point earthing resistance cabinet of HV auxiliary power transformer,
startup standby transformer ................................................................................... 50
3 Checks and Tests of Transformer ........................................................................................... 51
3.1
Checks and Tests before Transformer Putting into Operation ............................ 51
3.2 Check of Transformer in Operation .............................................................................. 52
-1-
3.3 Special Check of Transformer........................................................................................ 52

3.4 Check Items for Dry Transformer ................................................................................. 53
4 Transformer Putting In or Out of Operation ........................................................................ 53
4.1
Transformer Putting Into Operation ...................................................................... 53
4.2
Transformer Out of Operation................................................................................ 54
5 Abnormal Operation and Accident Handling of Transformer ............................................ 54
5.1
A transformer must immediately stop operating when the transformer occurs
one of the following conditions. ............................................................................... 54
5.2
When a transformer takes place one of the following conditions, it is permitted
to outage after reporting; if the condition is permissible, the standby
transformer can be changed over............................................................................ 54
5.3
Transformer Overload ............................................................................................. 55
5.4
Transformer Temperature High.............................................................................. 55
5.5
Handling for Transformer Gas Protection Action ................................................. 55
5.6
Handling for Transformer Differential Protection Action .................................... 56
5.7
Handling for Transformer Overcurrent Protection Action .................................. 57
5.8
A Mass of Oil Leakage of Transformer .................................................................. 57
5.9
Handling for Transformer Catching Fire ............................................................... 57
Chapter IV Distribution Device Manual ................................................................................................ 59
1 Equipment Specification of Distribution Devices .................................................................. 59
1.1
Technical Parameters of HV Sulfur Hexafluoride Circuit Breaker for
ZF9-252/Y4000-50 Gas Insulation Metal Enclosed Switchgear (GIS)...................... 59
1.2
Rated Insulation Level ............................................................................................. 60
SF6 Pressure Parameters (at 20) ......................................................................... 60
Parameters of Control Circuits and Auxiliary Circuits ........................................ 60
Technical Parameters of ZF9-252/Y4000-50 GIS Isolating switch ...................... 60
Technical Parameters of Overhaul Earthing Switch Used for ZF9-252/Y4000-50
GIS ............................................................................................................................. 61
1.7
Technical Parameters of Fault Closing Earthing Switch Used for
ZF9-252/Y4000-50 GIS ............................................................................................ 61
1.8
BANTEN 2300MW CFSPP Station ...................................................................... 62
1.9
Technical Parameters of Voltage Transformer JDQX8-150ZHA1....................... 62
1.10
Technical Parameters of Enclosed Busbar ............................................................. 62
1.11
Micro Positive Pressure Device of Enclosed Busbar ............................................. 62
1.12
Technical Parameters of Branch Circuit Enclosed Busbar .................................. 63
1.13
Detailed Parameters of Micro Positive Pressure system ....................................... 63
1.14 Excitation transformer, generator neutral point grounding transformer, risistance
and current transformer .......................................................................................... 63
2 Operation and Maintenance of Distribution Devices.............................................................. 63
2.1 General Manual for Distribution Devices ..................................................................... 63
2.2 Patrol Inspection of Contribution Devices .................................................................... 64
2.3 Normal Operation and Maintenance of Cable ............................................................. 65
2.4 Operation Maintenance of Isolating Knife Switch and Busbar .................................. 66
2.5 Operation and Maintenance of Instrument Transformer ........................................... 67
2.6 Operation and Maintenance of Lightning Arrestor ..................................................... 67
2.7 Operation and Maintenance of Enclosed Busbar ......................................................... 67
2.8 Operation and Maintenance of Trolley Type Switchgear ............................................ 68
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
-2-
2.9 Operation Manual for Auxiliary Power 6KV System Vacuum Switch and Vacuum
Contactor (F-C Circuit Switch) ............................................................................... 69
2.10 Manual for Check and Operation of GIS Combined Electrical Equipment ........... 70
3 Abnormal Operation and Accident Handling for Switchgear ............................................... 72
3.1 General Principle of Accident Handling ....................................................................... 72
3.2 Accident Handling Procedures....................................................................................... 72
3.3 In case of any of the following emergency situations, operators may firstly deal with
it and then report to the shift supervisors: ............................................................. 73
3.4 Manual on Accident Handling ....................................................................................... 73
3.5 Accident handling to abnormal system frequency ....................................................... 73
3.6 Accident Handling to Abnormal System Voltage ......................................................... 74
3.7 Power system oscillation ................................................................................................. 74
3.8 Busbar failure .................................................................................................................. 75
3.9 Line tripped ..................................................................................................................... 75
3.10 SF6 Circuit-breaker refusal to trip .............................................................................. 76
3.11 Lower Gas Pressure in SF6 Circuit-breakers ............................................................. 76
3.12 SF6 Circuit-breaker Failure to Close .......................................................................... 77
3.13 On-load closing isolators or closing isolators with earthing conductor .................... 77
3.14 ON-load opening isolators ............................................................................................ 77
3.15 Blown PT fuse ................................................................................................................ 78
3.16 Open circuit of CTs secondary side ............................................................................ 78
3.17 Immediately disable PTs and CTs in case of any of the following conditions. ......... 78
3.18 Lightning arrester failure ............................................................................................. 78
4 Accident handling to auxiliary power supply system failure ................................................. 78
4.1 General principle of accident handling ......................................................................... 78
4.2 Total loss of auxiliary power........................................................................................... 79
4.3 6kV busbar failure........................................................................................................... 79
4.4 Damage of 6kV withdrawable switch ............................................................................ 80
4.5 Tripping of Miniature Switches on 6lV PT Secondary Side ........................................ 80
4.6 Automatic circuit-breaker tripping ............................................................................... 80
4.7 Circuit-breaker Refusal to Close ................................................................................... 81
4.8 Circuit-breaker Refusal to Open ................................................................................... 81
4.9 Circuit-breaker Failure to Close .................................................................................... 81
4.10 380V busbar failure ....................................................................................................... 82
4.11 Broken 380V Voltage Circuit ........................................................................................ 82
4.12 Overcurrent of Certain 380V Section .......................................................................... 82
4.13 Immediately de-energize the cables in case of any of the following conditions: ...... 83
4.14 Cable Catching Fire ...................................................................................................... 83
Chapter V Electric Motor........................................................................................................................ 84
1 Equipment Specification............................................................................................................ 84
2 Motor Operation and Maintenance .......................................................................................... 84
2.1 General Provisions on Motors........................................................................................ 84
2.2 Provisions on Motor Operation...................................................................................... 85
3 Motor Patrol Inspection and Maintenance .............................................................................. 87
3.1 Inspection Prior to Motor Startup ................................................................................. 87
3.2 Inspection during Motor Operation .............................................................................. 87
-3-
Abnormal Operation and Accident Handling for Motors .................................................... 88

4.1 Motors Tripped during Operation ................................................................................. 88
4.2 Motors are Tripped Immediately after Circuit-breakers are Closed ......................... 89
4.3 The Quick-breaking or Overload Protection is Triggered when Motors Start up after
Installation or Maintenance .................................................................................... 89
4.4
After motor circuit-breakers are closed, the rotors remain standstill or the speed
can not reach the rated value, abnormal noise is heard, the motor current is zero
or remain at the full scale value of ammeters for more than normal time. ......... 89
4.5
During motor operation, running noise changes, running speed drops and motor
current abnormally rise or drop to zero. ................................................................ 90
4.6
The stator current undergoes cyclic swing during motor operation. ................... 90
4.7
Motors are overloaded ............................................................................................. 91
4.8 The motor stator temperature sharply rises and exceed the rated values.................. 91
4.9
Abnormal Vibration ................................................................................................. 91
4.10
Bearing Overheating ................................................................................................ 91
4.11
Slide rings, brush holders and brush frames are overheated during the
operation of wound rotor type motors.................................................................... 92
4.12
Dealing with Motors Catching Fire ........................................................................ 92
Chapter VI DC, Emergency and UPS Power Supply System .............................................................. 93
1 Equipment Specification for DC Systems ................................................................................ 93
4
1.1 JZ-BPD- smart battery monitor ............................................................................... 93

2
1.2
Technical Data of Storage Batteries:....................................................................... 95
Battery Operation and Maintenance ...................................................................................... 95
2.1
Operating Mode of DC Systems .............................................................................. 95
2.2
Operating Parameters of DC Systems .................................................................... 96
2.3
Patrol Inspection for DC Systems ........................................................................... 96
2.4
C. How to Operate DC System: .............................................................................. 97
Abnormal Operation and Accident Handling for DC Systems ............................................ 98
3.1
Abnormal DC Busbar Voltage................................................................................. 98
3.2
HF Switching Rectifier Failure ............................................................................... 98
3.3
DC Systems are Grounded ...................................................................................... 99
3.4
Treatment for other Failures ................................................................................... 99
Emergency Power Supply ...................................................................................................... 100
4.1
Technical Data of Diesel-engine Generator .......................................................... 100
4.2
Patrol Inspection for Diesel-engine Generators................................................... 100
4.3
Main Steps for Routine Diesel generating set test ............................................... 101
4.4
Start and Stop Mode of Diesel Generating Sets ................................................... 101
4.5
Main Steps for Returning Diesel Generating Set to Standby State .................... 102
4.6
Main steps for parallel operation with the protective section after the
diesel-engine generator has been manually started ............................................. 102
AC UPS System ...................................................................................................................... 103
5.1
Main Technical Data of the UPS ........................................................................... 103
5.2
Main Characteristics of the UPS........................................................................... 104
5.3
Startup ..................................................................................................................... 110
5.4
Shutdown ................................................................................................................ 111
5.5
Load Changeover to Service Bypass..................................................................... 112
5.6 Change over the load from service bypass to inverters ............................................. 112
-4-
5.7 Operating mode:............................................................................................................ 113

6 Operating environment of UPS: ............................................................................................. 114
Chapter VII Protection and Automatic Device.................................................................................... 115
1 General Provisions on Protections and Automatic Devices .................................................. 115
2 Patrol Inspection on Protections and Automatic Devices ..................................................... 116
3 Generator Transformer Unit Protection ............................................................................ 116
3.1
Brief introduction ................................................................................................... 116
3.2
Protective Functions of RCS-985A ....................................................................... 117
3.3
Generator transformer Unit Protection Configuration .................................... 119
4 Microprocessor-based Generator Synchronizer .................................................................... 121
5 150kV Circuit-breaker Protection ........................................................................................ 122
5.1
150kV Circuit-breaker Protective Functions ....................................................... 122
5.2
Technical Requirements for Automatic Reclosing ............................................... 123
5.3
Circuit-breaker Failure Protection ....................................................................... 125
5.4
Three-phase Discrepancy....................................................................................... 125
5.5
RCS-922A Stub Protection .................................................................................... 125
5.6
Circuit-breaker Operator Box .............................................................................. 126
6 150kV Line Protection ............................................................................................................. 126
6.1
RCS-902A Digital Rapid Ultra HV Line Protective Device (for 150kV Line) .. 126
6.2 SRCS-9611C Line measuring and Protective Device ................................................. 127
7. 150kV System Busbar Protection .......................................................................................... 128
7.1 Protection Configurations ............................................................................................ 128
7.2 Performance Characteristics........................................................................................ 128
7.3 Differential Busbar Protection ..................................................................................... 129
7.4 Circuit-breaker Failure Protection .............................................................................. 129
7.5 Check for Broken AC Current Circuits ...................................................................... 129
7.6 Device Operation Description ...................................................................................... 129
8. Computer-based Step-up Substation Supervisory Control System .................................... 133
8.1 Functions of Computer-based step-up Substation Supervisory Control System..... 133
8.2 Main Features of NCS300UX Supervisory Control System ...................................... 133
8.3 NSC300UX Architecture ............................................................................................... 133
8.3.1 System Structure ................................................................................................ 133
8.3.2 Main functions of computer-based supervisory control system:.................... 134
9. Startup/backup Transformer Protection............................................................................... 134
9.1 Protective functions of 1RCS-985T.............................................................................. 135
9.2 Other functions .............................................................................................................. 135
10 Rapid Auxiliary Power Change-over Device ....................................................................... 135
10.1 Main Features of the Device ....................................................................................... 135
10.2 Device Software ........................................................................................................... 136
10.3 Main Technical Specification...................................................................................... 136
10.4 Monitoring and Display function ............................................................................... 136
10.5 Changeover function ................................................................................................... 137
10.6 Load Reduction in case of Low Voltage..................................................................... 138
10.7 Alarm block and failure processing function ............................................................ 138
10.8 Abnormal Circuit-breaker Positions (Position Blocking/Decoupling).................... 140
10.9 Device Self-test Failure ............................................................................................... 140
-5-
PT Breakage ............................................................................................................... 140

Standby Power Failure Monitoring ......................................................................... 140
Unblocking ................................................................................................................. 140
Protection Speedup Functions .................................................................................. 141
Daily Maintenance .................................................................................................... 141
Failure Analysis ......................................................................................................... 141
Selection of 6kV Auxiliary Power Supply System Changeover Mode for #31, #32
and #33 Units .......................................................................................................... 142
11 6kV Auxiliary Power Supply System Protection and Automatic Device ........................... 142
11.1
Application of Series WDZ4OO Microprocessor-based protection in the plant
.................................................................................................................................. 142
11.2 WDZ-430EX Motor Protection and Control Device ................................................ 143
11.3 WDZ-431 EX Motor Differential Protection............................................................. 144
11.4 WDZ-410EX Line Protection and Control Device ................................................... 145
11.5 WDZ-440EX Transformer Protection and Control Device ..................................... 145
12 380V Auxiliary Power Supply System Protection and Control Device.............................. 146
12.1
Smart Controller .................................................................................................. 146
12.2
Smart MCC Control12.2.1 Device and Protection ........................................... 147
13.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................. 148
13.2
Typical Operation................................................................................................... 148
13.3
DCS System Failure ............................................................................................... 150
10.11
10.12
10.13
10.14
10.15
10.16
10.17
-6-
Chapter I Primary Wiring System

1
Electrical Primary Wiring
1.1 Main Electrical Primary Wiring

1.1.1
150kV Step-up Station

The connection mode of 150kV system is a typical 3/2 connection mode to be composed of 4
circuits of 3/2 circuit breaker connection, in which there are 3315MW generator units, a set of
startup standby transformer and 4 transmission lines to be separately connected.
BANTEN 3315MW CFSPP
BANTEN 3315MW CFSPP Station
The main connection adopts 3/2 connection with 4 equipment circuits and 2 protection
compartments. The equipments in this phase of project are composed of 12 circuit breakers, 32
groups of isolating switches, 34 groups of earthing switches and 8 groups of fault closing earthing
switches.
1.1.2
Connection of Generator-Transformer Unit

The generator-transformer unit adopts a unit connection of isolated phase enclosed busbar.
The neutral points of the high voltage sides of three main transformers are directly earthed.
Voltage transformers, lightning arresters and an excitation transformer are connected in parallel at
the generator outlet.
The neutral point of generator is earthed via a high impendence transformer.
Two sets of lightning arresters and voltage transformers are connected in parallel at the high
voltage side of the generator-transformer unit, one group of double-column outlet isolating switch
(double earthings) is installed, and two sets of earthing switches are set at both sides of it.
1.2 Auxiliary Power Connection

1.2.1
6kV Auxiliary Power System

Three high voltage auxiliary power transformers are split-winding transformers in which the
neutral point is earthed via a high resistance.
A standby auxiliary power supply is fed from 150kV system; one group of double-column outlet
isolating switch is installed at the high voltage (HV) side of startup standby transformer, and two
sets of earthing switches are set at both sides of it; the neutral point at the HV side of startup
standby transformer is directly earthed via a knife-switch; the neutral point at the low voltage (LV)
side is earthed via earthing resistance cabinet.
The LV side of startup standby transformer is connected with the LV sides of three HV auxiliary
power transformers in parallel, and separately connected to the section A and B of 6kV auxiliary
power.
Each unit is equipped with two sections of 6kV auxiliary power working busbars (separately
section 10BBA/10BBB, section 20BBA/20BBB and section 30BBA/30BBB), and all 6kV
auxiliary equipments of steam turbine and boiler are separately connected to the two sections of
auxiliary power working busbars.
6kV auxiliary power system is equipped with special common busbar sections; common loads are
respectively connected to 6kV common busbar section 00BBA and 00BBB which are separately
fed from sections 10BBB and 20BBB, and a busbar tie switch 00BBB02 is installed between the
two common busbar sections.
1.2.2
400V Auxiliary Power System

LV auxiliary power system adopts a neutral point direct earthing mode.
-7-
380/220 LV auxiliary power system of main building adopts power supply modes of power center
(PC) and motor control center (MCC). All LV transformers are separately configured in couples
on the basis of classifications of unit transformer, electrostatic precipitation transformer and
common transformer so as to achieve physical distribution and save cables in the main
building.
Each unit is equipped with two unit transformers with 2000KVA capacity in mutual standby and
two electrostatic precipitation transformers with 2000KVA capacity in mutual standby.
Three units are equipped with two 400V common busbar sections; the loads of main building and
LV common loads nearby are connected to the common busbar sections, which are separately fed
from two LV common transformers with 2500KVA capacity in mutual standby.
Each unit is equipped with a lighting transformer with 400KVA capacity, which is used as the
normal lighting power supply in the main building and nearby areas. One standby lighting
transformer is connected to 6KV common busbar section to use as a standby power supply of
380V lighting busbar sections for all units.
Each boiler is equipped with two electrostatic precipitation transformers with 2500KVA capacity
in mutual standby.
Two LV auxiliary power transformers with 1600KVA capacity in mutual standby are installed for
water treatment and service water.
The circulation water system is equipped with two LV auxiliary power transformers with 630KVA
capacity in mutual standby.
A comprehensive coal conveying building is equipped with two LV auxiliary power transformers
with 800KVA capacity in mutual standby.
1.2.3
Emergency Power Supply

Each unit is equipped with two sections of emergency power supply busbars with a busbar tie
switch installed between them to supply to all AC emergency loads of this turbine and boiler.
The capacity of each diesel generator selected is: 720KW, and there are 3 diesel generators which
are used as standby power supplies of emergency power supply.
2
2.1
Operation Modes of Systems

150KV System
A typical 3/2 circuit breaker connection mode is used for 150KV step-up station system. Three
generator-transformer units, a startup standby transformer and four outgoing lines are put into
operation and four 150kV series circuits are operating in closed loop under a normal condition.
The operation mode will be executed in special period in accordance with equipment overhaul
condition and commands of dispatchers.
There must be two series and above of circuit breakers to be operated in parallel in a special mode
when 150kV double busbars are operating.
The 150kV system must not be operating without busbar.
The standard frequency of 150kV system is 50Hz, and the deviation must not exceed 0.2Hz. The
system frequency is controlled in 500.2Hz in normal condition, the operator who is responsible
for monitoring panels should monitor the system frequency and report to the dispatcher on duty
when abnormal frequency occurs.
The voltage of 150kV system should be monitored and adjusted in accordance with the voltage
curve specified by the dispatching agency, and it should be reported to the dispatchers on duty
when the operation voltage exceeds the specified scope of voltage curve and can not be adjusted.
When power cut operations for overhaul are to be carried out, at first, the primary equipment
should be manipulated, and then, the relay protections should be stopped, the control power
-8-
supply switch should be switch off, and finally, the earthing knife-switch should be closed (or
earth wires are installed). When power on operations are to be carried out, at first, the earthing
knife-switch should be opened (or the earth wires are removed), and then the relay protections are
put into operation and the control power supply switch should be closed, and finally, the primary
equipment should be operated.
The actual current in each part of GIS must not be permitted exceeding the rated operating
current.
Circuit breakers, knife-switches and earthing knife-switches are prohibited to put into operation
before SF6 pressures have not reached the normal pressure value.
When there is SF6 leakage with GIS, the site inspection should be at least carried out by two
persons who wear oxygen mask. It should be checked fans are in normal operation before
entering into the site; if the fans are not put into operation, entry can not be permitted until the
fans are put into operation.
If it is found that the operating mechanism is blocked, knife switch and earthing knife switch do
not act, the operation should be stopped immediately when the 150kV knife switch and earthing
knife switch is manipulated in remote or in local. The operation can continues after the reasons
are found out and the fault has been eliminated.
After an operation of any 150kV circuit breaker, knife-switch or earthing knife-switch is
completed, the operation condition of the device should be inspected, and the next operation can
be carried out after it is ensured that three phases have been closed or opened.
As for normal power on and off operation of busbar, a circuit breaker must be used for busbar
charging or power cut, and all protections of this busbar should be put into operation before the
busbar charging.
In case a busbar is to power cut for overhaul, all circuit breakers in the side of the busbar and
knife-switches in both sides of the circuit breakers must be opened, the PT secondary switch of
this busbar shall be opened, and the earthing knife-switch shall be closed.
When 150kV incoming and outgoing lines are to be switched from the operation state to the hot
standby state, the middle circuit breaker should be opened at first, and then the circuit breaker in
the side of busbar should be opened; when 150kV incoming and outgoing lines are to be switched
from the hot standby state to the operation state, the circuit breaker in the side of busbar shall be
closed at first, then the middle circuit breaker shall be closed.
When a circuit breaker is to be switched from the hot standby state to the cold standby state, the
knife-switch in the load side shall be opened at first, and then the knife-switch in the power side
shall be opened; when a circuit breaker is to be switched from the cold standby state to the hot
standby state, the knife-switch in the power side shall be closed at first, and then the knife-switch
in the load side shall be closed.
When a 150kV outgoing line is to be switched from the hot standby state to the overhaul, the line
knife-switch should be opened at first, and then the earthing knife-switch in the line side shall be
closed after it is confirmed that there is no voltage on the line in accordance with the commands
of dispatchers.
When a 150kV outgoing line is to be switched from overhaul state to hot standby state, the
earthing knife-switch in the line side should be opened, protections for this line shall be put into
operation, the circuit breaker of the line shall be opened, and the knife-switch of the line shall be
closed in accordance with the commands of dispatchers.
When a busbar voltage failure occurs, it should be immediately reported to the dispatcher on duty,
and at the same time, all circuit breakers in the busbar side should be switched off.
It is strictly prohibited to unlock the lock devices of circuit breakers, knife-switches and earthing
knife-switches without authorization for forcedly operating the circuit breakers, knife-switches
-9-
and earthing knife-switches.

2.2
Auxiliary Power System

Auxiliary power busbar section 6kV10BBA & B/20BBA & B/30BBA & B are separately fed
from HV auxiliary power transformer 1, 2 and 3 in the normal operation mode. The startup
standby transformer 30 is used as an interlock standby of busbar section 6KV10BB A, B/20BB A,
B/30BB A, B by a quick switchover device.
In the normal operation mode, 6kV common busbar section A is fed from busbar section
6Kv10BBB via switch 10BBB05 and 00BBA01 in series; 6kV common busbar section B is fed
from busbar section 6KV20BBB via switch 20BBB05 and 00BBB01 in series; 6kV common
busbar section A and B is equipped with a busbar tie switch 00BBB02 which can be switched
over in normal condition or in emergency condition by a quick switchover device.
In the normal operation mode, 6kV common busbar section A is fed from busbar section 6kV31B
via switch 6205 and 6001 in series; 6kV common busbar section B is fed from busbar section
6kV32B via switch 6206 and 6002 in series; 6kV common busbar section A and B is equipped
with a busbar tie switch which can be switched over in normal condition or in emergency
condition by a quick switchover device.
In the normal operation mode, each busbar section of 400V auxiliary power is separately fed from
respective LV working transformer. Other busbar sections are divided into two sections of A and
B which are mutual standby; the standby lighting transformer provides a standby power supply of
the lighting busbar section.
All combined switches of MCC local power supply are in working positions. All MCC power
switches fed from PC busbar section are closed, and the working power supply in the MCC side
is switched on, a standby power supply is in interlock standby by ATS (automatic transfer
switching equipment).
In a normal condition, the operation mode of auxiliary power must not be arbitrarily changed
without consent of the shift supervisor; it should be immediately reported to the shift supervisor
after the operation mode of auxiliary power is changed under an emergency condition or accident
treatment.
In a normal condition, the HV auxiliary power transformer and the startup standby transformer,
and two LV transformers in mutual standby must not operate in parallel, but short time parallel
operation is permitted during switchover.
Two power supplies for each motor control center (MCC) and I&C distribution box must not
operate in parallel, but short time parallel operation is permitted during switchover.
2.3

In normal condition, each standby power switch of emergency power busbar section in the
distribution board of diesel generator is in interlock standby.
In normal condition, the working power supply of emergency power busbar section of the unit is
put into operation, and the busbar tie switch is in interlock standby.
The diesel generator will automatically start up after the unit busbar voltage is lower than the
setting value; it will be put into operation within 15s and carry 100% load.
In case the emergency power busbar section needs to switch to the working power supply when
the diesel generator operates to supply power to the emergency power busbar section, the
interlock of this section should be out of operation at first, and the standby switch should be
opened, and then the working power switch is closed, finally the diesel generator is switched over
standby state. (Instantaneous voltage loss of the emergency power busbar section will occur
during the switchover; therefore, some relevant measures should be taken to ensure the safety
operation of the unit.)
- 10 -
Chapter II Generator
1
Equipment Specifications
1.1
Generator Nameplate Parameters
Model
Rated capacity
Rated power
Rated
stator
voltage
Rated
stator
current
Rated
power
factor
Rated frequency
Rated rotary speed

Manufacturer
Steam Turbine Generator

QFSN-300-2-20B
Standard number of
product
371.7MVA
Insulation class
316 MW
Rated
working
hydrogen pressure
20 kV
Maximum
working
hydrogen pressure
10732 A
Wiring mode
Cooling water flow
rate of stator winding
50 Hz
Cooling
water
pressure of stator
winding
3000 r/min
Rated
excitation
current
Dongfang Electric Machinery Company Limited
0.85lag
GB/T7064
F
0.3 MPa
0.35 MPa
2Y
45m3/h
0.1-0.2 MPa
2153A
Introduction of Generator Model:

This generator is model QFSN-300-2-20B steam turbine generator unit of Dongfang Electric
Machinery Plant. It is a three-phase two-stage non salient pole rotor synchronous generator which
is directly driven by steam turbine. In which Q-denotes it is driven by steam turbine; F-denotes
generator; S-denotes the stator winding of generator adopts water cooling; N-denotes the rotor
winding of generator is internal hydrogen cooling; 300-denotes the rated capacity of generator is
300MW; 2-denotes the magnetic poles of generator are two poles; 20-denotes the rated voltage of
generator is 20kV; B-denotes tag number.
1.2
1.2.1
Design Specification of Generator

Main Design Parameters of Steam Turbine Generator
Rated power: 316MW
Rated apparent power: 371.7MVA
Rated voltage: 20kV
Rated current: 10.732kA
Rated power factor: 0.85
Rated frequency: 50Hz
Rated exciting voltage: 472V
Rated excitation current: 2153A
Rated rotary speed: 3000rpm
Numbers of phases: 3 phases
Connecting way: 2
Numbers of outgoing Terminals6
Short circuit ratio: 0.5929
Efficiency: 98.9
Each phase DC resistance of stator:

0.001658
Rotor winding DC resistance: 0.162766
No.load excitation voltage: 151.4V

No.load excitation current: 824.23A
- 11 -
Short-circuit excitation current: 1390.07A

Insulation class: F (examine as per Class B)
1.2.2
1.2.3
Technical Parameters of Hydrogen in Generator Stator Housing

Rated gauge pressure: 0.300.02MPa
Maximum gauge pressure: 0.35 MPa
Hydrogen purity: 95
Humidity under rated conditions:4g/m3
Cold hydrogen temperature: 30 to 45
Hot hydrogen temperature: 70
Hydrogen leakage in 24 hours:12 m3
Hydrogen volume in generator: 72 m3
Technical Parameters of Stator Cooling Water

Water inlet temperature:453
Water outlet temperature:90
Water flow rate: 45t/h
Water inlet pressure: 0.10.2 MPa
pH value: 6.58
Hardness:2g/L
Conductivity (20):0.5 to 1.5s/cm

1.2.4
Technical Parameters of Cooling Water for Hydrogen Cooler

Number of hydrogen coolers: 4
Water inlet temperature: 20 to 30
Water outlet temperature:45
Water inlet pressure: 0.1 to 0.2 MPa

1.2.5
Technical Parameters of Bearing Lube oil and Sealing Oil

Bearing oil inlet pressure: 0.05 to 0.1 MPa
Sealing oil differential pressure between

air side and hydrogen side: 0.005 MPa
Oil inlet temperature: 35 to 45
Oil outlet temperature:70
Sealing oil pressure is higher than hydrogen pressure by: 0.08 to 0.10 MPa
1.2.6
1.3
Generator Temperature Limit Parameters

Outlet water temperature of stator winding
and outgoing terminal: 85
Temperature among layers

winding: 90
of
stator
Temperature difference between layers of

stator winding: 15
Temperature of structural members on

stator end: 120
Rotor winding temperature: 120
Bearing bush temperature:90
Technical Characteristics of Generator

Cooling mode: water-hydrogen- hydrogen
Ventilation mode: A closed circulation multi-channel ventilation system with axial fans on both
ends is adopted in generator; the hydrogen in generator is cooled in the hydrogen cooler where
water flows by; Slip ring adopts open type pipe ventilation.
Water supply mode of stator winding: The cooling water of stator winding is supplied by the
cooling water tank of generator stator.
Hydrogen (oil) sealing mode: Single- ring type oil sealing is adopted.
- 12 -
Oil supply mode: The bearing lube oil is supplied by the lube oil system of steam turbine; the
sealing oil of oil sealing is supplied by an external sealing oil system.
Excitation mode: A self and shunt excitation system with GES-3320 synchronous generator
terminal transformer static rectification is adopted.
Insulation class: Insulation class F is used for stator winding and stator iron core (It is used as per
class B)
1.4
1.4.1
Basic Technical Requirements

Ambient Temperature
The environmental condition of continuous operation for generator and auxiliary equipments
(ambient temperature in main building) is 5 to 45.
1.4.2
Resistance Value Deviation of Stator Winding

After excluding the error caused by difference of lead wire lengths, the difference between the
measured values of cold state resistances in any two phases is not more than 1.0% of the
minimum.
1.4.3
Insulation Resistance
a The stator winding insulation resistance measured by 2500V megger is not less than 5M
in dry state at approximate working temperature.
b The rotor winding insulation resistance measured by 500V megger is not less than 1M
at room temperature (20).
c The insulation resistance of temperature measuring element measured by 250V megger is
not less than 1M at room temperature (20).
d The insulation resistance of excitatory side bearing and oil seal against ground measured
by 1000V megger is not less than 1M.
1.5
1.5.1
Structure of Generator Body

Stator Winding
The stator winding is double-layer basket structure formed by single-turn winding, adopts
continuous type class F epoxy powder mica insulation system and is provided with corona proof
measures on surface, and is provided with favorable insulating property and mechanical property.
The winding coil is cooled by water, water tie-ins are welded on both ends of bar and insulated
diversion pipes are connected to water inlet and outlet headers. Hollow lead and solid lead form
double-row leads in a specified proportion, in this way, a favorable cooling effect and higher
availability ratio of slots can be achieved, and 540transposition of coil is carried out in the slot
portion to reduce the circulating current loss.
1.5.2
Stator Iron Core

The stator iron core is assembled by the lamination of sector silicon steel sheets to be insulated
(staggered lamination is used). The silicon steel sheets selected are provided with lower loss and
good magnetic conductivity. Class F insulation paint added with inorganic filling is applied as
inter-sheet insulation after punching of the silicon steel sheets and burrs removing.
1.5.3
Generator Stand
Generator stand is a shell structure welded by steel plates and is provided with enough intensity
and rigidity. Its functions are to support stator iron core and stator winding, and form special
cooling air flow channel. Acting as an enclosed container of hydrogen, it can endure impacts
generated by accidental hydrogen explosion.
The stand is composed of end plate, sheath and air zone baffle plates etc which are assembled and
- 13 -
welded together to form special inlet air zone and outlet air zone. The stand is designed to three
sections, i.e. one intermediate section and two end shields.
The stand and the end shields have respectively undergone a hydraulic pressure test with 1.0MPa
for 30 minutes and an airtight test with 0.4MPa for 24 hours. The junction planes between the end
shields and the stand and between the end shields and the outgoing line are sealed by welding. A
method of inserting rubber strips into dovetail slot and applying sealant is used for sealing
between the end shields and the end covers.
A number of temperature measuring terminal blocks are laid in the lateral surface of end shields;
and lead wires of temperature measuring elements in the generator are led out by the temperature
measuring terminal blocks.
Flanges are used for connecting all external oil, water and air pipes to the generator.
1.5.4
Outgoing Line Terminal (Outgoing Line Bushing)

Six outgoing line terminals (three ones are neutral points, and three ones are output ends of
electric power) are led out from the nonmagnetic steel outgoing line shield in the lower part of
exciter end shield. The outgoing line terminal is composed of HV porcelain insulator and hollow
conductive bar in which cooling water flows through.
1.5.5
Generator Ventilation
The stator iron core and the rotor winding are cooled by hydrogen enclosed circulation system.
The hydrogen is driven by single stage axial fans on two ends of rotor.
The hydrogen stream from the axial fan enters into respective cold air zone by guide duct in the
generator stand, and enters into the air gap from the iron core back along the iron core radial
channel, and then it enters into channel of rotor winding to cool the rotor winding, afterwards, the
hydrogen stream returns to the air gap and enters into the hot air zone along iron core radial
channel, and flows through the cooler installed on the upper part of end shield via guide duct, and
then it return to the axial fan again to continuously circulate.
Quantity are equal and positions are coincident for air zones of stator and rotor; the cold air zones
and the hot air zones are alternately laid along axial direction, this kind of layout makes the stator
and the rotor to cool evenly and the temperature to be more uniform.
1.5.6
Temperature Detector
Resistance temperature detectors (RTD) and thermometers shall be installed in the following
positions:
Water outlet end of each water circuit of stator winding coil and outgoing line (RTD);
Between the upper layer coil and the lower layer coil of each stator slot (RTD);
Tooth portions and yoke portions of stator iron core (not less than 12 RTD);
Cold air side and hot air side of cooler (RTD and thermometer);
Bearing bush (RTD);
Bearing oil outlet pipe (RTD and thermometer);
Oil sealing oil outlet pipe (RTD);
Main water inlet pipe and each water outlet pipe of hydrogen cooler (RTD and thermometer);
Slip ring outlet air (thermometer);
Temperature elements are 1000platinum thermal resistance (double elements).
Lead wires of all temperature elements in the generator stand are shielded wires.
Thermocouples are laid in clamping finger, clamping ring and copper shielding on stator end.
All temperature limit values shall conform to the stipulations in national standard GB/T7046
- 14 -
when the generator is operating with specified cooling medium in the rated conditions.
1.5.7
Rotor Shaft
Rotor shaft is manufactured by integral high strength and high magnetic conductivity alloy steel.
There are axial slots machined on the rotor body to place excitation winding, at the same time, the
rotor body acts as magnetic circuit. Rotor is provided with transfer function, and endures torques
in accidental state and huge centrifugal actions generated by high speed rotation.
Transversal slots machined on the rotor gear wheel are used for equalizing the rigidities in gear
wheel and pinion direction to avoid multiple-frequency vibration resulting from a bigger rigidity
difference between the gear wheel and the pinion.
1.5.8
Rotor Winding
Rotor winding is made of silver-bearing copper wire with favorable electric conductive
performance, mechanical property and creep resisting performance. The slot portion of rotor
winding adopts a gap-pickup diagonal flow internal cooling mode, and the end part adopts
two-way ventilation cooling mode. When the rotor is rotating at high speed, the cold hydrogen in
the gap enters into winding diagonal channel from slot wedge windward scoop in inlet air zone
(The winding channel is formed by hole machined on the copper wire), and reaches the bottom of
slot, afterwards, it returns to the gap outlet air zone along another diagonal channel and carry
away copper wire loss. In this way, the rotor rotation generates air pressure to form self
ventilation system.
1.5.9
Generator retaining rings are made of non-magnetic high strength alloy steel forging, are provided
with a suspension type structure, and shrink on the two ends of rotor body. They are used for
protecting rotor end winding to prevent it flying apart due to centrifugal force.
The retaining rings on the two ends of rotor are equipped with damping rings which are made of
copper plate, and positioned on the tooth portion and goes into below the body slot wedge. The
damping rings improve the capability of bearing negative sequence load.
1.5.10
Generator slip ring is made of wear resistant alloy steel and is installed on the rotor by shrinking.
There is an insulating sleeve between the slip ring and rotor shaft. The slip ring and carbon brush
device can enhance the rated output of generator and excitation current required by reinforced
excitation.
There are axial and radial air holes on the slip rings. The spiral flute on the surface can improve
the contact condition between the electric brushes and the slip rings to make current distribution
to be even between the electric brushes. The slip rings are connected to the rotor winding by
means of conductive screws and rotor lead wires. The conductive screws are made of chromium
copper alloy and are provided with high strength and high conductivity. There is seal structure
between the conductive screws and rotor shaft to prevent hydrogen leakage. There are coaxial
centrifugal fans between two slip rings to forcedly cool the slip rings and the electric brushes.
1.5.11 The hydrogen in the generator stand is sealed by pressure oil between the rotor shaft and sealing
pad. The sealing oil pressure should higher than hydrogen pressure by 0.05MPa. The sealing
system is single-ring type. The sealing pad located in the sealing socket is split into two halves in
the axial and radial direction which are connected by spring and be provided with good follow-up
performance.
1.5.12 The generator uses horizontal split elliptical bearing. The mating surface of bearing and bearing
seat is spherical surface. The excitation bearing is equipped with insulation against ground to
prevent bearing journal and bearing alloy to be burned by shaft current. The bearing is installed
on the end cap. The end cap is made of steel plate by welding.
1.6
Cooling System of Generator

The cooling capacity of generator will affect the generator output to a certain extent, and the
cooling effect of generator will directly affect the load carrying capacity of generator,
- 15 -
consequently it must adequately attach importance to the cooling system of generator.

This steam turbine generator adopts a water-hydrogen-hydrogen cooling mode, i.e. the stator
windings (including stator winding coil lead wire, stator transition lead wire and outgoing line)
adopt internal water cooling; the rotor windings adopt internal hydrogen cooling; the stator iron
core and end structures adopt hydrogen surface cooling. The slip rings adopt air cooling.
The hydrogen in the generator stand is driven by axial fans installed on the two ends of rotor, and
carries out enclosed circulation.
The cooling system of this generator is mainly composed of three auxiliary systems of hydrogen,
oil and water, i.e. hydrogen control system, sealing oil system and stator coil cooling water
system.
1.6.1
Hydrogen System
The hydrogen control system is to use for displacing the gas in the generator, to feed hydrogen
into the generator in control, to keep the stabilization of hydrogen pressure in the generator, to
monitor the hydrogen purity and leakage of liquid and to dry the hydrogen in the generator.
The hydrogen system is equipped with a series of alarm switches which carry out controls and
alarms to hydrogen purity, pressure, temperature, hydrogen supply pressure and leakage of
generator.
Main technical parameters:
a Inside generator shell
Rated hydrogen pressure: 0.25MPa (gauge pressure, the same below)
Hydrogen purity: >96% (volume ratio)
Hydrogen humidity: 4g/m3 (0.25MPa under the condition of hydrogen pressure)
b Hydrogen filling volume of generator and hydrogen pipeline 71 m3
c Hydrogen leakage of generator and hydrogen pipeline system (excluding storage
equipment and hydrogen main pipe) 5% hydrogen filling volume
d Cooling water of generator hydrogen cooler
Numbers of coolers: 4
Water inlet temperature of hydrogen cooler: 20 to 38
Water outlet temperature of hydrogen cooler: 43
Water Inlet pressure: 0.10.2MPa
Water pressure drop: 0.042MPa
Drag pressure drop of hydrogen cooler: 0.222MPa
e Cold hydrogen temperature: 35 to 46
1.6.2
Sealing Oil System

The oil (in fact it is steam turbine bearing lube oil) needed by the sealing pad of generator is
customarily referred to as sealing oil according to the usage. The sealing oil system is exclusively
used for supplying oil to the generator sealing pad, and the oil pressure is higher than the
hydrogen pressure in the generator for a certain value to prevent the hydrogen leakage from the
gap between rotor shaft and sealing pad, meanwhile, prevent outrgeous oil pressure resulting in
large amounts of oil feed in the generator.
This generator adopts double-flow ring type sealing pad (two lines of the oil at the hydrogen side
- 16 -
and air side. The oil quantity, temperature and pressure are ensured by the external sealing oil
system.
1.6.3
Item parameter
Value
Rated differential pressure between the sealing oil

pressure and the hydrogen pressure
0.0850.01Mpa
Total oil quantity of the sealing pad at the air side
198L/min
Total oil quantity of the sealing pad at the hydrogen side
110L/min
Feeding temperature of the sealing oil
520C
Discharge temperature of the sealing oil (air side)
560C
Discharge temperature of the sealing oil (hydrogen side)
650C
Operating temperature
03MPa
Feeding temperature of the secondary cooling water
330C
Hydrogen purity
98%
Stator Cooling Water System

The stator cooling water system is used for ensuring water supply to the stator coil
uninterruptedly and monitoring parameters such as water pressure, flow rate and conductivity.
The system is equipped with an automatic water temperature regulator to regulate the water inlet
temperature of stator cooling water to sustain stabilization on the whole. Meanwhile, an ion
exchanger is installed to improve the quality of stator cooling water.
Water inlet pressure: 0.1 to 0.25MPa
Water inlet temperature: 453
Backwater temperature: 85
Water flow rate: 45m3/h (including water flow rate of end incoming line and outgoing line
5m3/h)
Water filling volume of the system: 3m3/h
Demanded circulation water flow rate: 160m3/h
Demanded circulation water pressure: 0.35MPa
Requirements of water quality:
Conductivity: 0.5 to 1.5s/cm20
Ph value: 7 to 8
Hardness: less than or equal to 2 microgram equivalent per liter
1.7
Generator Excitation System

This generator adopts type GES3320-T42F20L self and shunt static silicon controlled rectifier
excitation system of Dongfang Electric Machinery Control Equipment Co., Ltd. This excitation
system is mainly composed of excitation transformer, regulator, rectifier and magnetic blow-out
switch etc.
1.7.1
Product Model of Excitation Device
- 17 -
1.7.2
20
L
Demagnetization resistance is linear
resistance demagnetization
Rated current of magnetic blow-out

switch is 2500A
Magnetic blow-out switch is four

fractures
Power cabinet is 2 cabinets in parallel
Generator terminal transformer static

self and shunt excitation system
Rate output DC of single cabinet is

2000A
Power rectifier is silicon controlled

rectifier
Regulator adopts IPC busbar

industrial computer
3000 series products of Dongfang

Electric Machinery Control Equipment
Co., Ltd.
Generator excitation system
GES
Regulator is provided with redundancy

structure with double channels
Application Environment of Excitation Device

Ambient temperature
The maximum ambient temperature does not exceed +40. The minimum ambient temperature
is not lower than -10 when the air cooling device is used, and the cooling water temperature is
not lower than +5 when the water cooling device is used.
Relative humidity of environmental air
The monthly average maximum relative humidity is less than 90% in the operation location in the
moistest month, meanwhile, the monthly average minimum temperature in this month is not
higher than +25.
The altitude does not excess 1000m.
Gas pollution
There is no conductive or explosive dust in the operation location. There is no corrosive metal or
gas or vapor damaging insulation. There should be dust proof and ventilation measures in the
installation site.
Vibration
The vibration conditions in the installation site: the vibration acceleration is not more than 5m/s2
when the severity level of vibration frequency is 10 to 150Hz.
1.7.3
Basic Performance Indexes

The excitation system can continuously operate when the exciting voltage and excitation current
of synchronous generator do not excess the 1.1 times of the rated exciting voltage and current.
The times of ceiling voltage of excitation system (i.e. times of reinforced excitation voltage) is
not less than 1.8 times.
The time of reinforced excitation permitted by the excitation system is no less than 10s.
The nominal response of excitation system is not lower than 2 times/s.
Regulating scope of automatic exciting regulator:
1)When the generator is in no-load condition, it can ensure stable and smooth regulation within
the scope of rated no-load voltage 30% to 110% of generator;
2When the generator is in synchronization, it can ensure stable and smooth regulation within
the scope of rated no-load voltage 90% to 110% of generator.
Under the no-load operation condition, the change speed of specified voltage of excitation
- 18 -
regulator is not more than 1% of rated voltage of generator per second, and not more than 0.3% of
rated voltage of generator per second.
The setting range of generator terminal voltage adjustment ratio (reactive current compensation
rate) is 0 to 15.
The excitation system guarantees the generator static voltage error to be 1.
The change rate of generator terminal voltage is not more than 0.25 when the frequency
changes 1% under the condition of generator no-load operation.
The overshoot of generator voltage is not more than 50% of step quantity, the times of swings do
not excess 3 times and the regulating time does not excess 5s when the specified voltage step is
10 under the condition of generator no-load operation.
The automatic exciting regulator guarantees the overshoot of generator terminal voltage does not
excess 15% of the rated value, the times of wings do not excess 3 times and the regulating time
does not more than 10s when the generator suddenly increases voltage from zero.
The maximum instantaneous value of rectified voltage on the two ends of field winding is not
more than 30% of voltage amplitude of field winding in the routine test when the field current is
less than 1.1 times of rated value.
The current stabilizing factor of silicon controlled rectifying bridge is not lower than 0.85 and the
voltage balance factor is 0.9 when there are parallel branches and connections in series.
1.7.4
Signal and Power Supply

1) Input signal
The electrical input signals of excitation device derive from voltage transformer and current
transformer, and the specification parameters are:
Voltage 3100V 50Hz
three phases
Current 35A
three phases
50Hz
2)Conditions of working power supply

The permissible deviation of AC voltage is -15% to +10% of rated value, and the permissible
deviation of frequency is -6% to +4% of rated value.
The permissible deviation of DC voltage is -20% to +10% of rated value.
1.7.5
Main Equipments of Excitation System

The excitation system utilizes excitation current to regulate generator terminal voltage and
reactive power; the excitation current is fed from the silicon controlled rectifying bridge; the
automatic exciting regulator controls the output of the silicon controlled rectifying bridge. The
excitation transformer provides power source to the excitation system.
1)
Excitation transformer
Description
Excitation transformer
Specification and technical

parameters
3600KVA20/0.9KV
Ud=8% Yd11
Quantity
3
The excitation transformer provides power source to the excitation system and electrically
separate the excitation equipment and the generator terminal. The HV side of excitation
transformer is connected to the generator terminal, and LV side is connected to the AC input
side of high power silicon controlled rectifying bridge.
2)
Silicon controlled rectifying bridge
- 19 -
The silicon controlled rectifying bridge rectifies the AC current provided by excitation
transformer to DC current to output to the excitation circuit of generator. In general, three
groups of bridges work in parallel and share the load. The device satisfies the excitation
requirement under the rated operation condition of generator when one group of bridge is out
of operation.
The automatic exciting regulator controls the silicon rectifying bridges and regulates the output
power of it to change the excitation current of generator, so that the generator terminal voltage
and reactive power are regulated.
3)
Magnetic blow-out switch

The magnetic blow-out switch is a visible break point between the generator rotor winding and
the exciting rectifying bridge. DC output of silicon controlled rectifying bridge is fed to the
generator rotor winding by the magnetic blow-out switch.
4)
Automatic exciting regulator

The automatic exciting regulator is located in the regulating cabinet, and is divided into several
parts of signal processing, control calculating and signal output. It acquires information of
various analog quantities and switch quantities of generator, and controls the outputs of silicon
controlled rectifying bridges by calculating and processing of industrial computer so as to
achieve the control objectives of excitation system.
The automatic rectifying regulator adopts redundancy and fault tolerance structure with double
channels. Signal acquisition, input regulation, calculation and signal output are provided with
two sets of independent hardware circuits. Two channels are associated as well as
independently work. The channels adopt master-slave mode to work in parallel and are mutual
hot standby. The channels achieve mutual diagnosis and real time online self diagnosis, mutual
follow-up, mutual communication and mutual switchover by means of software. When there is
no fault with the two channels and two computers power on, one computer which completes
the system initialization earlier is the master and will gain the masterdom of excitation system;
another computer is a hot standby of the master, when once it detects main channel to be in
malfunction, it will replace the main channel. The switchover from the master to the slave can
also be carried out by human -computer interface.
The analog signal input quantities for regulator includes: generator terminal voltage, generator
terminal current, system voltage, exciting current and synchronous voltage.
1.7.6
Control Command
1)
System putting into operation

(1). Automatic startup: i.e. Startup command, the excitation system is automatically put into
operation. The regulator orderly executes closing magnetic blow-out switch, starting up cooling
fans of excitation cabinet and putting the excitation initiating circuit into operation.
(2). Manual excitation initiating: i.e. Excitation Initiating or Excitation Putting into
Operation command. After the magnetic blow-out switch is closed, if the command is
effective, the regulator will put the excitation initiating circuit into operation and the system
initiates excitation to specified position.
2)
System switch off

Automatic Shutdown and Excitation Switch Out (inversion) command will make
regulator implement the inverting demagnetization program of rectifying bridge.
The inversing demagnetization should be used at a normal demagnetization without tripping
the magnetic blow-out switch. The magnetic blow-out switch will trip in accident, and the
magnetic field energy will be released by the demagnetization resistance.
3)
Operation of magnetic blow-out switch

- 20 -
It includes magnetic blow-out switch switch-in and magnetic blow-out switch switch-off.
4)
Setup of regulating mode

Four regulating modes can be set up: constant generator terminal voltage (automatic operation
state), constant excitation current (manual operation state), constant reactive power (automatic
operation state) and constant power factor. The default mode is: constant generator terminal
voltage operation mode.
In principle, four operation modes can be switched over during operation; there is no fluctuation
of generator terminal voltage and reactive power to occur during switchover. Exceptions are as
follows:
(1). If a fault happens when the constant voltage operation mode is used, the constant current
operation mode will be automatically switched. It is not permitted to switch to the constant
voltage mode and another two modes before the fault is eliminated.
(2). When the generator is operating in no-load state, it is not permitted that the exciting
regulator is switched to constant reactive power mode and constant power factor mode; the two
modes are effective only after the main circuit breaker of generator is closed.
Note: The constant current regulating mode (manual) only regulates the excitation current,
excluding all limitation functions. Therefore, operators should nearly monitor the generator
excitation when the regulator is operating in constant current mode (manual). It is not permitted
the generator is operating in the constant current regulating mode in long term.
5)Excitation increase/ excitation decrease

Excitation increase/ excitation decrease commands increase or decrease the set point of
system regulating object.
The increase/decrease excitation command is to artificially change the specified voltage of
generator under the constant voltage mode. This operation will change the voltage of generator
in no-load condition; this operation will change the reactive power in load condition. When a
limitation function acts, the corresponding limitation will make the increase/decrease excitation
command to be invalid.
The increase/decrease excitation command is to artificially change the reactive power and the
power factor of generator and make them keep the set points under the constant reactive power
and constant power factor mode.
The increase/decrease excitation command is to change the specified field current under the
constant current mode. This operation will change the generator terminal voltage in no-load
condition; this operation will change the reactive power in the load condition. Operations
should be careful in the constant current operation mode, the limits of generator and excitation
system must not be exceeded, because the limitator will be out of function in the constant
current mode.
The increase excitation (decrease excitation) operation will be invalid when the set point
reaches the maximum (minimum).
1.7.7
Protection Limitation Function

The excitation system contains several limitation functions in order to achieve reliable operation
of excitation system. The purpose of limitator is to make generator operate in a permissible scope
to avoid relay protection action resulting in the generator not to be able to operate continuously.
This device provides the following protection limitation functions:
1)
Excitation initiating failure

After the command of excitation initiating is send, the generator does not successfully build up
voltage in 8 seconds, the regulator will judge the excitation initiating failure, and send
- 21 -
corresponding alarm signals and cut off the power supply of excitation initiating.
2)
Inverting failure
After the command of shutdown or excitation switch-out is sent, the generator terminal voltage
does not successfully decrease to 15% rated value and below in 10 seconds, the regulator will
judge the inverting failure, afterwards the magnetic blow-out switch will automatically trip to
demagnetize by means of demagnetization resistance absorbing the magnetic field energy.
3)
Overvoltage protection
A rotor overvoltage protection device bridges over the excitation circuit. The core part of this
protection device is ZnO nonlinear resistance, once a surge voltage occurs and excesses the
setting value, the protection device will act. The responding value of overvoltage is set to 4 to 5
times of rated exciting voltage.
4)
Rotor overcurrent limitation

It is used for current limitation and protection of generator excitation circuit. When the
excitation current is more than 1.1 times of rated excitation current and less than the reinforced
excitation current, the inverse time lag excitation current protection will be started up; when the
excitation current equals to the reinforced excitation current, the ceiling excitation current
limitation will act and 10s delay (settable) is permissible.
It will judge whether or not an overexcitation occurs and the overexcitation magnitude, if
overexcitation occurs, it will decide to take ceiling value limitation or inverse time lag
limitation in accordance with the magnitude of overexcitation; if the overexcitation time
reaches the setting time, the overexcitation limitation mark will be placed, and the generator
excitation current is limited to the rated value.
5)
Underexcitation limitation
The limitation curve is decided by five operating points of (P1, Q1), (P2, Q2), (P3, Q3), (P4,
Q4) and (P5, Q5). The coordinates of the five operating points are set up in the
human-computer interface station. It will calculate and judge whether or not the
underexcitation occurs in accordance with the feedback signals. If the underexcitation occurs,
the underexcitation limitation mark will be placed and the excitation will be automatically
increased.
6)
V/Hz limitation
The V/Hz ratio will be calculated in real time. If the V/Hz ratio is more than setting value, the
V/Hz limitation control program will be started up so as to decrease the generator terminal
voltage and make the V/Hz ratio reach the setting value, at the same time, the V/Hz limitation
action mark will be placed.
7)
Output power limitation of power cabinet

It will judge whether or not there is any power cabinet out of service and the quantity. If there
is any power cabinet out of service, the marks for power cabinets out of service and quantity
will be placed, and the power cabinet out of service limitation program will be called to limit
the excitation in accordance with the quantity of power cabinets out of service.
8)
Stator current limitation

After the generator stator current reaches the limit value specified, if the generator is in lagging
phase operation, the excitation will automatically decreased; if the generator is in leading phase
operation, the excitation will automatically increased.
9)
TV break wire protection

When U10.85U2, the regulator considers the generator terminal TV break wire, and
automatically switches to the standby channel to carry out automatic operation; It will switch to
- 22 -
the constant current operation mode if PT break wire occurs in standby channel.
In which: U1: Generator terminal PT secondary voltage measured by AVR;
U2: Voltage value of comparison signals measured by AVR, it usually comes from synchronous
voltage.
10) Pulse loss detection
When the pulse forming circuit board in the industrial computer of main channel loses pulse,
another industrial computer will be automatically switched, meanwhile alarm signals will send.
When the pulse magnifying circuit board of rectifying cabinet loses pulse, the regulator will
send corresponding alarm signals, meanwhile the pulse output of this rectifying cabinet will be
locked and this rectifying cabinet will be out of operation.
Operation and Maintenance
2.1
Check and Preparation Work before Steam Turbine Generator Startup
2.1.1 Before the excitation initiating after new installation or overhaul of a generator, it should be
checked that the test report and the completion notice are complete and qualified; there is no error
with startup measures; all maintenance persons are evacuated from the site; the work permits of
generator and auxiliary equipments are taken back; all safety measures are removed; whether or
not all short circuit wires and earthing cables are completely removed and all standing fences and
nameplates are resumed.
2.1.2
All parts conditions should be checked in detail before the generator is started up.
(1). 150kV system has been put into operation; the startup standby transformer, the auxiliary power
system and DC system have been put into operation; the diesel generator is in good standby
state.
(2). The primary and secondary circuits of generator, main transformer, HV auxiliary power
transformer and auxiliary equipments are normal, and are provided with conditions of putting
into operation.
(3). All joint faces of generator body and shell are tight; all screws are tightened; there is no short
circuit and smudge with generator bearings; the cold and hot hydrogen thermometers on both
sides of generator shell are in good condition.
(4). The slip ring surface of generator is clean and smooth without scratch; all carbon brushes are
firmly installed; the distance from the lower edge of any carbon brush to the surface of slip ring
is 2 to 3mm; the surfaces of carbon brushes and the slip ring contacts well; the effective length
of carbon brushes are not less than 5mm, and the spring pressures are normal.
(5). Enclosed busbars of generator, main transformer and HV transformer are complete without
foreign matter.
(6). The appearances of generator outlet voltage transformer, arrester and voltage transformer in the
low side of HV auxiliary power transformer are complete; there is no damage, crack
phenomena with all porcelain insulators; lead wires and earthing cables are connected firmly;
primary fuses are in good condition; secondary air switches have been closed, and all primary
contact heads contacts well.
(7). Equipments in generator neutral point cabinet are in good condition, the connecting cables of
neutral point high impedance transformer are in good condition.
(8). Magnetic blow-out switch, automatic voltage regulating device and rectifying cabinet and fans
of generator are in good condition; there is no damage and dropout phenomenon in operation
mechanism.
(9). The mechanical part of withdrawable switch in the LV side of HV auxiliary power transformer
is normal and the operating part is normal, the connections of operating mechanism are firm,
- 23 -
and the wirings of control circuits are firm.

(10).Instruments, signal devices, relay protection devices and automatic and remote devices of
generator are normal, the protection setting values are correct, all equipment positions in the
generator control display are correct, the signal test is satisfactory, and the complete set test of
generator is normal.
(11). Main transformer and HV auxiliary power transformer have been checked to be ready for put
into operation, the SF6 circuit breaker and isolating switch at outlet of generator-transformer
unit are checked in accordance with requirements, and are provided with condition of putting
into operation. All earthing knife switches (earthing wires) are in open position in accordance
with the requirements.
2.1.3
All parts of generator-transformer unit are measured to be qualified.

(1). The stator winding is dry without residual water; the insulation resistance against ground and
between phases should be 5M (measured by 2500V megaohmmeter) when it is close to
the working temperature.
(2). The cold (20) insulation resistance value of rotor winding should be 1M (measured by
500V megaohmmeter).
(3). The cold insulation resistance value of each resistance detector should be 1M (measured
by 250V megaohmmeter).
(4). Insulation resistances of stator collecting pipe and water inlet pipe of stator outgoing line:
When there is no residual water, they are 100k (measured by 1000V megaohmmeter).
When water is flowing, they are 30k (measured by 1000V megaohmmeter).
(5). Insulation resistance value of inner and outer oil baffle caps of generator exciter side bearing
should be 1M (measured by 1000V megaohmmeter).
2.1.4
The stator cooling system of generator is put into operation.
2.1.5
The sealing oil system of generator is put into operation.
2.1.6
The hydrogen cooling system of generator is put into operation.
2.1.7
All instrument devices, relay protection devices, automation devices and alarm signal devices of
generator are put into operation.
2.1.8
Tests are carried out prior to startup of generator

(1). Protection and alarm signal test.
(2). Closing and opening tests and interlock test of main circuit breaker and magnetic blow-out
switch
(3). Interlock test of excitation DC switch.
(4). Big interlock test of turbine, boiler and electrical part.
(5). Interlock test of working power supply and standby power supply of rectifying cabinet fans,
and fan interlock tripping rectifying cabinet test.
(6). Switchover test of HV auxiliary power (after parallel operation of generator)
(7). Protection transmission tests should be carried out when there is working in the secondary
circuits or protection circuits of generator-transformer unit.
(8). Stator hydraulic pressure and hydrogen seal test should be carried out after overhaul of
generator.
(9). No-load test and short circuit test should be carried out after overhaul of generator.
(10). Closing and opening test of main circuit breaker should be carried out after overhaul and minor
- 24 -
repair of generator.
2.1.9 All connections of electrical part are to be checked; the generator circuit breaker, the magnetic
blow-out switch and the withdrawable switch in the LV side of HV auxiliary power transformer are
in open position.
The generator-transformer channel is energized.
2.2
2.2.1
Workings after Impulse Starting of Steam Turbine

Live Equipment
Once a generator is turning, even the revolutions are very low, the generator and various devices
connected should be considered as carrying voltage, therefore, it is prohibited to carry out any work
in its circuit.
2.2.2
Check at Initial Speed

a Check whether the mechanical connections of generator are firm, confirming whether or
not there is any looseness and dropout phenomena.
b
2.2.3
Check whether there is any friction sound and other abnormal phenomena with generator.
Check at half speed

a Check whether there is any bad contact or bounce phenomena with the slip rings and
carbon brushes when the rotary speed of generator reaches a half of rated rotary speed.
b The operation of generator cooling system is to be checked, and it should be monitored
whether or not the operation parameters of cooling medium conform to the requirements of
specified values.
c) The temperature value of each measured point for generator is to be checked and the
generator temperature rise condition is to be monitored.
d) Check that the connections of electrical primary circuit of generator-transformer unit are in
good condition without discharge phenomena.
e) Check that sounds of generator, main transformer, HV auxiliary power transformer and
excitation transformer are normal and the cooling devices of transformers are normally
operating.
2.3
2.3.1
Operations
Power on Operation of Generator-Transformer Channel
Check that all safety measures are removed for generator-transformer unit channel and all
standing fences and nameplates are resumed; the primary wirings and the secondary wirings are
in good condition and ready for power on.
Check that the isolating knife switch at the HV side outlet of main transformer is in open position.
It is to be measured that the insulation resistances of generator, main transformer, HV auxiliary
transformer and excitation transformer are qualified.
The DC power supply of protection panel A, B and C of generator-transformer unit is switched on,
the outlet strap on the protection panel A, B and C are correctly put into operation as specified.
Generator outlet PT is energized, and the air switch in the secondary side is closed.
The earthing knife switch of generator neutral point is switched on.
Exciting regulating system, magnetic blow-out switch, excitation initiating power supply and fans
of exciting regulating system are energized.
Cooling devices of main transformer and HV auxiliary transformer are energized and the trial
runs of them are normal.
- 25 -
Working branch incoming line PT of 6KV busbar section A and B are energized.
HV side PT of generator-transformer unit is energized.
2.3.2
Power on Operation of Excitation System

1) The following conditions should be satisfied before excitation initiating:
There is no equipment maintenance to be carried out at the same time;
The control devices get ready;
Generator equipments get ready;
Generator reaches rated rotary speed;
There is no alarm and fault with any device;
Excitation is in cut off position;
Excitation is in remote (control room) operating mode;
Exciting regulator is in the constant voltage or constant current regulating mode;
The set point of exciting regulator is rated value in no-load condition (or lower than rated value
in no-load condition); (The operating state of generator is placed in quasi-synchronization;
(The system pressure signal is reliably switched on).
2) Excitation switch-on
The magnetic blow-out switch is closed;
Excitation initiates, the generator will build up voltage in 5 to 8 seconds.
The generator voltage is regulated by increasing /decreasing excitation operation, and the
system is ready to synchronization.
The generator will operate with the power grid system in parallel after synchronization of the
power grid system and the generator are achieved.
The reactive power is regulated to the expected value by increasing /decreasing excitation
operation.
3)
Excitation switch-off
Reactive power is decreased, and active power is decreased, the main oil circuit breaker of
generator trips;
The excitation is cut off, and the generator terminal voltage is zero;
The magnetic blow-out switch is opened (if necessary).
2.3.3
Generator synchronization operation

The command of shift supervisor is received: generator synchronization operation
Check that the rotary speed of generator is >3000r/min, the hydrogen pressure is >0.1MPa and the
stator cooling water is normal.
Check that the neutral point knife switch of generator has been closed.
Check that the earthing knife switch in the HV side of main transformer is in open position.
Check that the earthing knife switch of generator-transformer unit is in open position.
Check that the protections of generator-transformer unit is put into operation as required.
The isolating knife switch at the HV side outlet of main transformer is closed.
Check that the main circuit breaker of generator is in Closing Permit, and Remote Operation
Permit.
Check that there is no fault with generator AVR.
- 26 -
Check that the excitation mode selected is Constant Generator Terminal Voltage Operation
Mode
The magnetic blow-out switch of generator is closed.
The generator excitation launches.
The generator voltage is raised to 20kV.
Request Synchronization is send to DEH.
The generator parallel switch is selected.
The generator ASS is put into operation.
Check that the closing of generator circuit breaker is normal.
The generator ASS is cut off.
The generator PSS device is put into operation.
2.4
2.4.1
Normal Operation Mode of Generator

Permissible Temperature and Temperature Rise
During generator operation, it must specially pay attention to the temperature and temperature
rise of each part of generator not to exceed the permissible value so as to ensure the safety
operation of generator.
The temperature of generator stator winding is measured by a temperature detector (thermocouple
or resistance element) embedded among wires, and the temperature of rotor iron core is measured
by a sector phenolic aldehyde laminated sheet with temperature detector embedded in the iron
core.
The temperature of rotor winding is normally measured in accordance with the resistance change
under cold state and hot state, or is calculated in accordance with the readings of rotor voltage
meter and rotor current meter.
The maximum permissible monitoring temperature for rotor, stator winding and stator iron core is
the temperature generated when the generator operates continuously under the conditions of the
rated cooling gas temperature and rated power.
The permissible temperature value of each part of generator depends on the class of insulation
material used by winding.
The maximum permissible temperature of each part of winding is stipulated as follows when the
generator operates as per the rated data on the nameplate:
Maximum permissible temperature of stator winding
120
Maximum permissible temperature of rotor winding 130

Maximum permissible temperature of stator iron core
120
The permissible temperature rise is difference between the maximum permissible temperature and
the rated temperature of cooling medium.
The standard of current increase or decrease comparing to the rated value is subject to the
temperature of winding not to exceed the original maximum permissible temperature specified
when the temperature of generator cooling medium changes.
The inlet air temperature of hydrogen cooling generator should not be lower than 20.
2.4.2
Permissible Change Range of Voltage

The change range of generator operation voltage is 5 of rated voltage while the power
factor is rated value, and the rated capacity of generator keeps not to change, i.e. the stator current
can increase 5% when the voltage decreases 5%; the stator current can decrease 5% when the
- 27 -
voltage increases 5%.

The maximum permissible voltage for generator continuous operation should comply with the
stipulations of manufacturer, but the maximum voltage must not be more than 110% of the rated
value; the minimum operation voltage of generator should be decided in accordance with the
requirements of stable operation, and should not be lower than 90% of the rated value.
2.4.3
Permissible Change Range of Frequency

The generator can operate according to the rated capacity when the change range of frequency
does not exceed 500.2Hz.
2.4.4
Operation Mode Decided by Change of Power Factor

The power factor of generator should be kept in 0.85 lagging phase. In order to ensure the stable
operation, it is stipulated that the power factor of generator must not exceed 0.95 lagging phase.
The output of generator should be decreased when the power factor is lower than the rated value.
The output of generator will keep unchanging when the power factor changes between the rated
value and 1.
2.4.5
Permissible Unbalanced Load Range

The permissible unbalanced current value of generator should comply with the stipulations of
manufacturer.
When there is no stipulation from the manufacturer, as for the generator with air cooling and
hydrogen surface cooling, the following stipulations should be implemented:
aWhen the generator continuously operates with rated load, the difference between three phase
currents of steam turbine generator must not exceed 10% of the rated current, at the same time,
any phase of current must not be more than the rated value.
bWhen the generator operates with a load to be lower than the rated load, the difference
between three phase currents can be more than the abovementioned stipulation, but the detailed
value should be decided in accordance with the test which should meet the following constraint
conditions:
cAs for a steam turbine generator with wound rotor, it is prohibited to operate under the
unbalanced load.
The permissible short-time unbalanced generator current value should comply with the
stipulations of manufacturer.
When there is not stipulation from the manufacturer, as for the generator with air cooling and
hydrogen surface cooling, it can be calculated as per I2*2t30.
In which, I2*per unit value of negative sequence current; tduration time of I2
Internal cooling generator I2*2t3 to 10.
When operators finds the unbalance of three phase currents exceeds the permissible value during
the operation of generator, the causes should be found out and eliminated immediately, otherwise,
the load should be decreased as specified.
Permissible time when unbalance of three loads exceed 10% above
IbigIe
I Ie
Two phase currents are

equal, and are smaller
than the third phase
current (Ismall/ Ie)
Two phase currents are
equal, and are smaller
than the third phase
currentIsmall/ Ie
0.51
0.51
0.56
0.62
0.73
0.82
0.912
0.27
0.27
0.44
0.55
0.68
0.81
0.908
- 28 -
I2
Per unit value of negative

sequence currentI2/ Ie
0.45
0.45
0.35
0.28
0.20
0.12
0.06
Permissible
time
Permissible duration time

(min)
Immediately
shutdown
10
Long
term
operation
2.4.6
Permissible Overload
It is not permitted that the generator operates with overload in normal operation.
There is not big influence to the life time of insulation for short-time overload.
The permissible value of short-time overload should comply with the stipulation of manufacturer.
When there is no stipulation from the manufacturer, the generator with air cooling and hydrogen
surface cooling can make reference to the following table to execution.
Short-time
overload
winding/rated current
Duration timemin
current
of
stator
1.10
1.12
1.15
1.25
1.50
60
30
15
When the stator current of generator exceeds the permissible value, operators should at first check
the power factor (cos) and voltage of generator, the power factor should not be too high, and the
voltage should not be too low, at the same time, the time of overload should be paid attention, the
stator current should be reduced to the maximum permissible value by means of the method of
reducing the excitation current within the permissible time in accordance with the stipulations on
site, but the power factor must not be too high and the voltage must not be too low. In case the
stator current can not be decreased to the permissible value by reducing the excitation current, the
active power of generator must be reduced or a part of load must be cut off.
The permissible value of short-time overload for an internal cooling generator should be
implemented in accordance with the stipulations of manufacturer. If there is no stipulation from
the manufacturer, it should be decided by calculating.
2.4.7
Reinforced excitation capability of generator

The generator can endure a reinforced excitation voltage of 2 times of rated exciting voltage and
the duration time is 10s. The rise speed of reinforced excitation voltage is not less than 2/sec.
2.4.8
General Manual of Generator Operation

The mode that generator operates in accordance with the nameplate parameters of manufacturer is
the rated operation mode; the generator can continuously operate over a long period of time under
the rated operation mode or in the range of the capacity limit curve.
It is not permitted the generator operates with load without internal cooling water of stator.
It is not permitted the generator operates without excitation in the normal condition.
The operation time of steam turbine unit with reverse power must not more than 1 minute.
Leading phase operation of generator must be otherwise stipulated after it is tested up to standard.
2.5
2.5.1
Monitoring in Operation
General
The operation conditions of generator should be monitored in operation, and each part of
generator should be systematically checked so as to find any abnormal phenomena and eliminate
the abnormity as soon as possible.
2.5.2
Recording of Operation Parameters

a)All operation parameters of generator should be recorded once every hour, and the power and
current values should be recorded once a half hour at the maximum load.
b)The temperatures of stator winding, stator iron core and inlet and outlet air must be checked
- 29 -
once every hour, and recorded once every two hours. If an automatic recording meter is installed,
the recording interval can be properly extended.
c)The insulation resistances of stator and excitation circuit should be measured once each shift.
d)All recordings of meter readings for all automation units should be carried out at the periodical
patrol inspection.
2.5.3
2.5.3.1
Patrol Inspection Items of Generator

Check in Operation of Generator
1)
The indication of each meter should not exceed the permissible and the relationship
should be correct.
2)
Each light signal and switch position feedback should conform to the actual indication
position and be correct.
3)
The voltage and current meters of three phases of generator should balance.
4)
There is no abnormity with the acoustic-optic alarm.
5)
The relay room and automation device should be normal without overheating and fuming
phenomena.
6)
Each switch position conforms to the actual operation mode.
7)
The operation of DC system is normal.
8)
The operation of regulator is normal, and each indication instrument conforms to the
actual condition.
9)
The sound of generator is normal, and the vibration of unit does not exceed the
permissible value.
10) There is no overheating, discharge and spark phenomenon with switches, busbars,
instrument transformer and cables in the excitation system.
11) Equalizing springs of generator carbon brushes are firmly installed and the pressure is
appropriate, there is no overheating with carbon brushes and slip rings, and there is no
spark between the slip ring and the carbon brushes.
12) It is to be checked from the sight holes on the ends whether or not there is any dew and
water leakage phenomenon on the two sides of generator body, there is any vibration and
abrasion phenomenon with the insulated diversion pipes, and there is any local
overheating point on the clamping ring.
13) The cold and hot hydrogen temperatures are normal.
14) The stator winding temperature and the hydrogen outlet temperatures of stator winding are
normal.
15) The cooling water pressure, temperature difference and terminal difference of cooler
should be normal.
2.5.3.2
Check of Excitation System

1) Check items of exciting regulator
All indication meters in the panel are normal.
There is no overheating of all elements and unexpected noise and peculiar smell in the
panel.
All indications in the panel conform to the operation mode.
There is no abnormal signal lamp to light in the panel.
Positions of all miniature switches in the panel conform to the operation mode.
- 30 -
The ambient temperature, humidity and vibration do not deteriorate.

2) Check items of rectifying cabinet
Indications of all meters in the rectifying cabinet are normal.
All indicator lights for operation should be light; the reactive power cabinet is out of
service, and there is an indication that quick-acting fuse is blown.
The signals of rotor overvoltage protection cabinet are normal without abnormity
phenomenon.
Operation of each fan of rectifying cabinet is normal.
There is no heating phenomenon with each connection.
3) Check items of magnetic blow-out switch
There is no heating and discoloration with connections.
There is no burnt odor and abnormity of mechanism.
There is no abnormal rise of ambient temperature, in general, it does not exceed
40.
The excitation initiating device is in good condition.
4) Check items of carbon brushes and slip rings in excitation circuit
There is no crack and rupture with equalizing springs of carbon brushes; there is no
spark on the contact surfaces of carbon brushes; there is no bounce and fragmentation of
carbon brushes, and they can freely carry out up and down move. The carbon brushes
are not shorter than the limitation line; carbon brushes and brush flexible do not heat and
discolor; there is no broken strand with brush flexible; there is no looseness on the roots
of brush flexible; the types of carbon brushes are same.
There is no crack on the brush holder, and it is clean.
The brush rings are clean and round without scuffing and heating phenomenon.
2.6
2.6.1
Parallel Off and Shutdown of Generator

Parallel Off and Shutdown of generator (reverse power protection acting)
(1).
Check that the power supply of 6kV working busbar section is switched from the
working power supply to the standby power supply.
(2).
The active load of generator is decreased to zero.
(3).
The reactive load of generator is decreased to 5Mvar.
(4).
The protection of generator inadvertent energization and startup/shutdown is put into

operation.
(5).
It is informed to the steam turbine chief operator of this unit that the trip of steam turbine
can be carried out.
(6).
Check that the reverse power protection has acted after the main stop valve of steam
turbine is closed.
(7).
Check that the main circuit breaker of generator-transformer unit has opened, and
currents of three phases are 0.
(8).
Check that the generator terminal voltage has decreased to approach 0.
(9).
Check that the magnetic blow-out switch has reliably opened.
(10). The PSS device is out of service.

- 31 -
(11). It is to be checked at local that the main circuit breaker of generator-transformer unit has
reliably opened.
(12). The isolating knife switch at the HV side outlet of the main transformer is opened.
(13). It is to be checked at local that three phases of isolating knife switch at the HV side outlet
of the main transformer have reliably opened.
(14). The power cut operation for the circuit breaker of working power supply of 6kV working
busbar section A is carried out.
busbar section B is carried out.
(16). The operation of HV auxiliary power transformer cooler is stopped.
Note: the stop time of main transformer cooler is executed in accordance with the operation
Manual of transformer.
2.6.2
Parallel Off and Shutdown of Generator (Reverse Power Protection Refusing Action)
(1).
Check that the power supply of 6kV working busbar section is switched from the
working power supply to the standby power supply.
(2).
The active load of generator is decreased to zero.
(3).
The reactive load of generator is decreased to 5Mvar.
(4).
The protection of generator inadvertent energization and startup/shutdown is put into

operation.
(5).
It is informed to the steam turbine chief operator of this unit that the trip of steam turbine
can be carried out.
(6).
It is confirmed that the main stop valve has closed, and the reverse power of generator
has occurred (non positive value)
(7).
The main circuit breaker of generator-transformer unit is switched off, Check that the
currents of three phases of main circuit breaker are 0.
(The judgment of step 6 and the operation of step 7 should be completed in one minute.)
(8).
Check that the generator terminal voltage has decreased to approach 0.
(9).
Check that the magnetic blow-out switch has reliably opened.
(10). The PSS device is out of service.

(11). It is to be checked at local that the main circuit breaker of generator-transformer unit has
reliably opened.
(12). The isolating knife switch at the HV side outlet of the main transformer is opened.
(13). It is to be checked at local that three phases of isolating knife switch at the HV side outlet
of the main transformer have reliably opened.
busbar section A is carried out.
(15).
The power cut operation for the circuit breaker of working power supply of 6kV
working busbar section B is carried out.
(16). The operation of HV auxiliary power transformer cooler is stopped.

(17). The electrical maintenance persons are informed to search for the causes of refusing
action for reverse power protection.
2.6.3
Power Cut of Generator-Transformer Unit

(1).
Check that the isolating knife switch in the main transformer HV side is in open position;
- 32 -
2.6.4
(2).
The power cut operation of PT in the main transformer HV side is carried out;
(3).
The power cut operations for cooling devices of main transformer and HV transformer
are carried out;
(4).
The power cut operation for the excitation regulating system is carried out; (Note: The
industrial computer of the excitation regulating system will be shut down before power
cut to avoid the data losing of the industrial computer at power turnoff);
(5).
The secondary miniature switch of generator outlet PT is switched off, and the PT trolley
is drawn to the isolation position and locked, the PT HV side fuses are taken off;
(6).
It is to be checked the working branch circuit breaker of 6KV busbar section A and B has
cut power, and the power cut operation of the working branch incoming line PT is carried
out;
(7).
The relevant protections are stopped;
(8).
Safety measures are taken in accordance with the requirements of maintenance.
Shutdown in Normal Condition

Before the generator parallels off, the auxiliary power should be at first switched over to the
standby power supply, and then the active load should be reduced to zero, the reactive load should
be reduced to approach zero, the trip of steam turbine is informed, the generator shall parallel off
by action of the reverse power protection. Check that the generator voltage is reduced to zero, the
magnetic blow-out switch shall be switched off, and the cooling device of main transformer and
HV transformer shall be stopped.
After the generator is completely shut down, the insulation resistances of stator winding, rotor
winding and other parts should be immediately measured in the hot state. Meanwhile, Check
whether the water in gas cooler has stopped circulating, and it should be recorded in a specified
record book.
2.6.5
Shutdown in Emergency Condition

Check whether all three phases of main circuit breaker are opened; whether or not the magnetic
blow-out switch is opened; whether or not the generator voltage is zero. The generator and the
primary system should be immediately checked to find whether or not they are damaged.
2.7
Maintenance after Shutdown
2.7.1
Long Term Shutdown

During long term shutdown, hydrogen has been discharged outside the generator, the sealing oil
system and other accessory systems have stopped working, therefore, the relevant maintenance
items are list as follows:
1)
Exhausting Hydrogen in the generator

The upper and lower screw plugs of hydrogen sealing cover located between generator stand and
end cap are unscrewed, and the hydrogen to be likely to collect in the sealing cover is discharged.
All dead zones on the top of the base are purged by compressed air to exhaust the hydrogen in the
generator.
2)
Emptying the residual water in the water circuits of stator winding

a The drain outlet in the lower part of collecting pipes on steam end and excitation end are
opened to discharge the residual water in the collecting pipes.
b The inlet and outlet water pipes are removed, the steam end outlet water flange is covered
with cover board, an air flexible pipe is connected to the excitation inlet water flange to carry
out purging, and the compressed air should be clean without oil and dust.
c The water in the water circuits of stator winding are purged by compressed air in several
- 33 -
times, till there is no water smoke in the air purged.

d And then the residual water to be difficult to purge by compressed air are drawn out by
means of a vacuumizing method.
3)
Water circuit maintenance of stator winding

In order to avoid the oxidation of inner wall of hollow copper wires, the water circuits of stator
winding should be periodically washed out via water inlet and outlet by nitrogen. Afterwards,
the inlet and outlet water flanges are closed down.
4)
Maintenance of hydrogen cooler

The hydrogen cooler is cleaned; after cleaning, the residual water is emptied and the pipes is
dried by compressed air and treated by corrosion protection.
5)
Anti-dew in the generator

Two manhole covers can be removed and an air heater or an air dryer is installed in the
positions of two manholes to continuously dry the air in the generator. It should be considered
that air can circulate through all spaces in the generator when the installation positions of air
heater or the air dryer are decided.
6)
Maintenance of rotor
During long term shutdown, if the rotor is placed in the generator for long period of time, it
should be turned 90 degree once every three day to avoid the rotor taking place bend and
permanent deform.
7)
Safety measures
eh
2.7.2
Short Term Shutdown

1)
General
2)
The following parameters is to be periodically monitored and recorded

a Hydrogen purity, humidity and pressure.
b Temperature and pressure of sealing oil.
c Temperature and conductivity of stator cooling water.
d Hydrogen leakage measured.
3)
Hydrogen sealing
The normal operation of sealing oil system is maintained, the sealing oil pressure is kept to be
higher than the hydrogen by 0.056MPa, and the sealing oil temperature is higher than 30 to
ensure sealing up hydrogen.
4)
Hydrogen purity
The hydrogen purity is to be measured periodically, and the hydrogen purity in the generator
should be kept in 96% above by means of supplementing fresh hydrogen.
5)
Anti-dew
The relative humidity in the generator is controlled 50 to prevent the inside of generator
from dew. During shutdown, the relative humidity in the generator is relative to the temperature
around the generator. The relative humidity in the generator is measured periodically and at the
time of the ambient temperature decreased by 8 above. If the relative humidity in the
generator is too high, some hydrogen should be discharged from it and some dry hydrogen is
implemented to reduce the relative humidity.
6)
Cooling water of stator winding

- 34 -
Water is used for circulation cooling the stator winding and the cooling water temperature is at
least maintained to be higher than the hydrogen temperature in the generator by 5 above to
prevent the water content in the hydrogen to dew on the stator winding, meanwhile, achieve a
purpose preventing the hollow copper wires of stator winding from oxidation and corrosion. If
necessary, the stator cooling water can reverse to run.
The conductivity of stator winding is to be checked periodically, the conductivity of water in
the water tank should be kept in the specified range.
7)
Maintenance of cooler
In order to avoid the corrosion and scaling of cooling water pipe, a small flow of water should
always flow through the cooler. In addition, the cooler should be washed out twice every week
by water with a large flow rate.
8)
Safety Measures
xi
2.8
Accident Handling
2.8.1
Adjustment under the Condition of Abnormal Operation

The abnormal operation of generator refers to an operation condition, in which the temperature,
voltage, current, frequency, load nature, excitation conditions and cooling conditions of generator
obviously deviate from the rated value.
2.8.1.1
Generator Temperature Abnormity

When the generator operates under the condition of rated load or approaching rated load, if the
stator winding temperature or iron core temperature of generator exceeds the limit value, or the
rotor temperature exceeds the limit value, the cause must be immediately found out.
If the temperature rise of generator results from the interruption of cooling water or the decrease
of cooling water flow rate entering into the hydrogen cooler, then the water supply should be
immediately resumed. If the water supply can not be consumed immediately or the cooling
system is normal, then the generator load must be immediately decreased till the temperature is
reduced to the permissible value. If the generator temperature can not be controlled in the range
of permissible value after reducing load, the unit should be shut down to inspect.
2.8.1.2
Overcurrent of Stator Winding and Rotor Winding of Generator

Overload or overcurrent is not permitted in normal operation of generator; a permissible operation
range is clearly marked on the power diagram. When a power grid accident occurs, some units
will trip; the reinforced excitation of the generator will act in order to sustain the stable operation
of the power grid and the generator and resume the voltage of power grid when the voltage of
power grid is decreasing, at this moment, the overcurrent of stator and the rotor overvoltage of
generator are permitted in a short time.
The multiple and the duration time for the short time operation with permissible overcurrent and
overvoltage are relative to the heating of stator and rotor windings as well as the heat resistances
of insulation materials.
The multiple and the duration time of permissible overcurrent of stator are calculated as per
I2-1t37.5s.
In which I2per-unit value of stator overcurrent; tduration time, it is applicable to the range of
10 to 60s
Multiple of overcurrent
Duration times
2.00
12.5
1.50
30
1.40
39
1.32
50
1.27
60
Note: The stator temperature will exceed the value at the rated load under the abovementioned
overcurrent condition; therefore, a limitation of twice overcurrents per year should not be
- 35 -
exceeded.
When the generator operates with stator overcurrent, operators should at first inspect the power
factor and the voltage of generator, and record the time and the magnitude of overcurrent. The
excitation current should be reduced and the stator current will be reduced to the normal value
within a permissible duration time in accordance with the stipulations in site Manual, but the
stator voltage must not exceed the minimum permissible value.
If the stator current can not be reduced to the normal value by decreasing excitation current, the
active load of generator must be reduced.
Multiple and permissible time of rotor overvoltage
The reinforced excitation time of generator is not less than 10s when an accident occurs, in
general, the reinforced excitation multiple (the ratio of maximum of reinforced excitation voltage
to the excitation voltage) does not exceed 2.
Multiple and permissible time of short-time overvoltage for internal cooling type rotor winding
Multiple of overvoltage
Permissible times
2.8.1.3
1.12
120
1.25
60
1.46
30
2.08
10
Asymmetry Operation of Generator

When the generator carries out asymmetry operation, the maximum phase current in stator current
is likely to exceed the rated value, which should be limited according to the relevant stipulations
in short-time or continuous overcurrent.
The capability that a generator bears negative sequence current is decided by the maximum
permissible temperature of rotor surface structural member.
When the generator outlet circuit breaker can not be fully opened or closed at the same time and
results in the non-all-phase operation fault of generator, operators should immediately decrease
the output power of steam turbine and the excitation current of generator to make the active
power and the reactive power of the unit approaching zero so as to minimize the negative
sequence current. For this reason, the main stop valve of steam turbine should not be closed and
the excitation current of generator should not be switched out in order to avoid the negative
sequence current not to be able to decrease effectively.
2.8.2
2.8.2.1
Handling under Accident Condition

Emergency Shutdown
Smoke emission and catch fire or hydrogen explosion in the generator occur.
Generator sealing oil is interrupted and can not be rapidly consumed.
Generator slip ring generates intense circle sparks and can not be eliminated.
Generator unit generates severe vibration (exceed permissible value).
Steam turbine or boiler trips, but the main circuit breaker of generator does not trip.
There are serious water leakage from the stator bar and lead wire.
The electrical connecting equipments related to generator such as main transformer, HV auxiliary
power transformer etc. take place serious fault.
Other accidents to endanger personal and equipment safety occur.
2.8.2.2
Applying for Shutdown

Generator is operating without protection.
The temperature and the temperature rise of the unit exceed the permissible value, and there is no
effect after taking measures.
Rotor interturn short circuit is serious and the rotor current has reached the rated value, and the
- 36 -
reactive power is still very small.

The hydrogen pressure in the generator is too low to keep the normal operation of generator, or
the hydrogen quality in the generator has deteriorated and can not resume the normal value after
taking measures.
2.8.2.3
a)
Generator Outlet Circuit Breaker Trip

Phenomena
The circuit breaker of auxiliary standby power supply is closed by interlock.
The indications of all meters of generator are zero.
The action indicator lamps of relevant protections illumine (or signals send out).
b)
Solution
Sound signals are released.
Check that the auxiliary standby power supply is put into operation by interlock, if no action, if
the quick-trip protection and overcurrent protection do not act, and there is no lock signal from
quick switchover device, and there is no obvious short circuit symptom, then the circuit breaker
of standby power supply can be manually closed to resume the auxiliary power. If the working
branch circuit breaker does not open, the working branch circuit breaker should be at first opened,
and the standby branch circuit breaker is closed quickly.
It is to be judged in accordance with the relevant meters and protection actions whether or not the
protection action is correct, whether or not the action of each circuit breaker is normal, and all
these should be reported to the shift supervisor.
The fault nature and range is analyzed and judged in accordance with protection action, a detailed
check will be carried out; the maintenance personnel and test personnel should get together to
eliminate fault as soon as possible.
If the generator trips by protection action due to the system fault, the dispatcher should be
contacted in time, the synchronization will be carried out over again after the fault is eliminated.
If the generator trips due to the protection false action, the synchronization will be carried out
over again after the chief engineer agrees.
If it is confirmed the generator trips due to factitious false action, the synchronization can be
carried out at once after the dispatcher agrees without checking.
2.8.2.4
a)
Generator Excitation Loss

Phenomena
1DCS accident alarm sounds and alarm signal sends out.
2The indication value of generator rotor current equals to zero or approaches zero.
If the excitation circuit of exciter breaks, the voltage indication and the current indication of rotor
are zero;
If the rotor circuit breaks, the rotor voltage will rise, and the current is zero;
If a short circuit of rotor circuit occurs, the rotor voltage will drop, and the current will rise;
When the excitation loss results from the interturn short circuit of rotor winding, the rotor current
is not zero.
3The stator current indication rises and is likely to exceed the rated value and periodic swings
occur.
4The active power indication reduces and swings.
5The generator terminal pressure indication slightly reduces and swings.
- 37 -
6The reactive power indication is negative value.

7The parameters of excitation circuit show abnormity.
8When the trip is caused by the excitation loss protection, in addition to the abovementioned
instantaneous phenomena, the main circuit breaker and the magnetic blow-out switch will state up
the quick switching device to switch off the auxiliary working branch circuit breaker and switch
on the circuit breaker of standby power supply.
b)
Solution:
1The generator excitation loss protection acts, the unit disconnects with the system, it is to be
handled as per generator accident trip.
2If the generator excitation loss protection does not act, the excitation should be immediately
manually increased, if without effect, the generator immediately parallel off.
3When the excitation loss protection acts to send signals or is not put into operation, manual
parallel off, demagnetization and shutdown should be carried out.
4The generator should immediately disconnect with the power grid system when the generator
excitation loss gives rise to oscillation.
5The generator excitation system is to be checked after parallel off, and the generator will be
restarted to synchronize after the fault is eliminated.
2.8.2.5
a)
Generator Oscillation
Phenomena
The indications of stator voltage meter, current meter, active power meter, reactive power meter,
busbar voltage meter rhythmically swing, and judder under the serious condition.
The voltage usually drops and the current rises.
The frequency meter indication rises or drops, and slightly swings.
The generator sends out rhythmical purr which is in step with the meters.
If the oscillation results from the out-of-step of this generator, the swing amplitude of this
generator is more severe than the neighbor generator, and the swing direction of active load of
this generator displayed is reverse to the neighbor generator; if it is system oscillation, the swings
of two generators is synchronous.
b)
Solution
The generator excitation circuit instruments are checked, if the oscillation results from the false
parallel on or excitation loss of generator, the generator should immediately disconnect with the
power grid system.
In the case of the generator oscillation results from an accident of the power grid system, if the
excitation regulation is in automatic mode, it is strictly prohibited to switch to the manual mode,
the excitation current should be increased as possible; if the automatic excitation is put into
operation, the reinforced excitation will act, it is strictly prohibited to intervene the action of
excitation circuit regulator in 20 seconds.
The active load is to be decreased to eliminate the oscillation, but the frequency can not be lower
than the responding value of frequency protection.
If the oscillation of the generator and the power grid system occur, the generator can not be pulled
in step in a specified time after operators takes abovementioned measures, the generator should
parallel off immediately. The steam turbine and the boiler will be handled as per shutdown (the
vacuum is not damaged).
If the oscillation results from the power grid system, the generator excitation current should be
- 38 -
increased to keep the system voltage, and the handling will depend on the command of dispatcher.
2.8.2.6
a)
Generator Non-synchronous Parallel

Phenomena
The parameters of generator takes place a great number of change and oscillation, the reinforced
excitation of automatic excitation regulator is likely to act.
The unit generates vibration and accompanies with roar.
The generator out-of-step protection is likely to act.
b)
Solution
When the generator out-of-step protection acts to trip, the handling will be carried out as
consistent with a trip of the main circuit breaker.
If the generator has not obvious sound and vibration, and the oscillation amplitudes of all
parameters indicated gradually attenuates, the generator can not shut down.
If the generator gives birth to very strong impact and severe vibration, and it is shown that the
swings are terrible without attenuation, the generator should immediately parallel off and shut
down.
When a generator without excitation takes place false parallel on, it should immediately parallel
off.
If a non- synchronous parallel gives rise to a trip of the generator-transformer unit, the protection
actions should be immediately checked, and the conditions should be reported to the shift
supervisor, the generator-transformer unit will be roundly checked and tested so as to decide
whether or not synchronization will be carried out again. The AC impedance of generator rotor is
to be measured. The deputy general manager in charge of production should be asked for
instructions concerning whether or not the generator can restart and parallel on.
2.8.2.7
a)
Generator Reverse Power Operation

Phenomena
The active power indication is negative value or zero, the active energy meter reverses.
Reactive power indication rises.
Stator current decreases.
Indications of stator voltage and excitation meters are normal.
The main stop valve of steam turbine is closed.
The frequencies of the power grid system and the generator decreases slightly.
b)
Solution
When the reverse power operation of generator occurs, if the reverse power protection does not
act, the handling should be carried out as per the following procedures.
The auxiliary power is to be switched over to the standby power supply.
The generator is to be disconnected with the power grid system.
The magnetic blow-out switch is switched off.
The operation time of reverse power must not exceed 1 minute.
The causes should be found out after the generator parallel off, and the generator can be restarted
to parallel on after the fault is eliminated.
2.8.2.8
a)
Motor Rotor One-Point Earthing

Phenomena
- 39 -
DCS sends out a signal of Rotor One-Point Earthing.

The rotor earthing signal lamp is light on the protection panel.
b)
Solution
The rotor two-point earthing protection is put into operation (automatically put into operation).
The excitation system is to be roundly checked whether or not there is any obvious earthing point.
The monitoring of excitation system is strengthen, if the rotor current is found to increase, and the
reactive power obviously decrease, the generator immediately parallels off and shuts down.
When an external earthing of rotor winding occurs, the maintenance personnel should be
contacted to eliminate or isolate the earthing point so as to ensure the normal operation of this
unit.
The rotor excitation circuit will be checked in detail, if the earthing results from the dirt retention
on the slip ring or excitation circuit, the dry air which is lower than 0.294MPa can be used for
purging to resume insulation. If necessary, the rectifying cabinet can be disabled in check so as to
judge whether or not the earthing is located in the DC circuit of rectifying cabinet. In case field
loss or out-of-step occurs during the handling process, the generator should be shut down.
If it is confirmed the generator rotor winding exists earthing fault, the generator should try for
shutdown as soon as possible.
2.8.2.9
a)
Two-Point Earthing in Excitation Circuit

Phenomena
The rotor current indication sharply increases, the excitation voltage indication decreases, and
fluctuation is likely to appear; the reactive load indication decreases or reverses, and the generator
voltage decreases; the unit acutely vibrates.
b)
Solution:
If the protection acts to trip, the handling will be carried out as per the fault shutdown, and safety
measures of maintenance should be taken.
When the rotor two-point earthing protection refuses action, the abovementioned phenomena
occur, the generator should immediately parallel off to shut down.
2.8.2.10 Generator Stator Earthing

a)
Phenomena
1)A protection alarm Generator Stator Earthing sends out.
2)The generator protection acts to trip.
b)
Solution
When the stator earthing protection acts to trip, the handling will be carried out as per generator
trip.
If an alarm Generator Stator Earthing accompany with another alarm There Is Oily Water in
Generator successively occur, the generator should carry out an emergency shutdown.
When the stator earthing protection has send out signals without trip, an appearance inspection to
the generator outlet PT and the excitation transformer should be immediately carried out, the
relay protection personnel should be informed to measure the secondary voltage of generator
neutral point distribution transformer and the secondary voltage of generator outlet PT. The
generator should immediately parallel off and demagnetize when it is confirmed there is an
internal earthing in the generator after comprehensive analysis and judgment.
If only alarms send out, the action condition of triple harmonic stator earthing should be checked
immediately, a detailed inspection should be carried out nearby the neutral point, and electrical
- 40 -
maintenance personnel should be informed to carry out inspection.

After shutdown, the maintenance personnel should be contacted to separately measure the
generator outlet PT, the excitation transformer insulation and the generator stator insulation to
judge the fault taking place the outside or the inside of generator.
2.8.2.11 Generator Water Shut Off
a)
Phenomena
An alarm Stator Winding Water Circuit Water Shut Off on DCS and sound alarm send out.
The cooling water flow rate in the stator winding is lower than 35t/h.
The working stator cooling water pump is likely to trip.
If it does not resume in 30 seconds, the water shut off protection acts to trip, and there is Water
Shut off Protection Action drop.
b)
Solution
The standby stator cooling water pump is immediately started up.
The internal cooling water is tried to resume to the normal value as soon as possible in a possible
short time.
It is to be found out whether or not the protection device or check and measurement part takes
place false action. If false action is confirmed, then the water shut off protection will be out of
service and the relevant personnel will be informed to carry out treatment at once. The water shut
off protection should be put into operation immediately after the treatment is completed.
If the water shut off is true, when the protection fails to act, the generator will be immediately
shut down.
2.8.2.12 Generator Inner Explosion and Catching Fire

a)
Phenomena
There is violent abnormal explosion sound in the inside of generator, and there are smoke
emission and burnt odor on the two sides.
The cooling gas pressure in the generator rises or greatly decreases, and the outlet temperature
rises.
The hydrogen purity decreases, and the voltage fluctuation is terrible along with explosion.
b)
Solution
If the protection does not act, the trip of steam turbine should be immediately carried out, the
excitation is cut off, and the generator keeps a specified rotary speed (200r/min).
The hydrogen is rapidly discharged, the hydrogen filling valve will be tightly closed, and CO2
will be filled into the generator.
Fire fighting will be carried out in accordance with the stipulations in fire fighting Manual.
- 41 -
Chapter III Transformer

1
Equipment Specifications
1.1
Equipment Technical Parameters of Main Transformer
Model
Type
Cooling mode
Rated frequency
Rated capacity
Rated
voltage
ratio
SFPZ10-370000/150 TH
Outdoor three-phase double-coil copper winding on-load voltage regulating
oil-immersed low loss transformer
Forced directed oil circulation air cooling (OFAF)
50Hz
370MVA
15081.25%/20 kV
LI/AC 950/395KV
HV line terminal
Insulation level
HV
neutral
terminal
point
I.v.line terminal
Connection
symbol
Short
circuit
impedance
No-load current
Manufacturer
LI/AC 400/200KV
LI/AC 200/85KV
Numbers of
Phases
No-load
loss
No-load
current
3
160.95kw
0.14
Ynd1
14.19
20.76A
Shandong Power Equipment Company
Voltage Taps of Transformer

High voltage
Position of
switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9A
9
9B
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1.2
Connection
K+
K-
X1-Y1-Z1
X2-Y2-Z2
X3-Y3-Z3
X4-Y4-Z4
X5-Y5-Z5
X6-Y6-Z6
X7-Y7-Z7
X8-Y8-Z8
X9-Y9-Z9
XK-YK-ZK
X1-Y1-Z1
X2-Y2-Z2
X3-Y3-Z3
X4-Y4-Z4
X5-Y5-Z5
X6-Y6-Z6
X7-Y7-Z7
X8-Y8-Z8
X9-Y9-Z9
Low voltage
Current
VoltageV Current A VoltageV
A
165000
1294.7
163125
1309.5
161250
1324.8
159375
1340.4
157500
1356.3
155625
1372.7
153750
1389.4
151875
1406.5
150000
1424.1
148125
146250
144375
142500
140625
138750
136875
135000
1442.2
1460.6
1479.6
1499.1
1519.1
1539.6
1560.7
1582.4
200000
10681
Equipment Technical Parameters of HV Auxiliary Power Transformer

Model
Type
SFFT10-50000/20 TH
Three-phase oil immersed air cooling copper core low loss LV side split
- 42 -
Model
Cooling mode
Rated frequency
Rated capacity
Rated voltage
Insulation level
Use condition
Altitude
Connection symbol
manufacturer
SFFT10-50000/20 TH
winding no-load voltage regulating transformer
Oil immersed air cooling (OGAF)
50Hz
50000/27000-27000kVA
2022.5%/6.3-6.3kV
HV line terminal
L1/AC
200/85KV
I,v line terminal
L1/AC
75/35KV
I,v neutral point terminal
L1/AC
75/35KV
outdoor
1000m
Dyn1yn11
Shandong Power Equipment Company
Voltage Taps of HV Auxiliary power transformer

High Voltage
Position
of switch
Voltage
Current (A)
(V)
C2-C3
21000
1100.00
C3-C4
20500
1126.50
C4-C5
20000
1154.7
C5-C6
19500
1184.3
C6-C7
19000
1215.5
Low voltage 2
Voltage (V)
Current (A)
6300
2291.1
Connection
A2-A3
B2-B3
A3-A4
B3-B4
A4-A5
B4-B5
A5-A6
B5-B6
A6-A7
B6-B7
Low voltage 1
Voltage (V)
Current (A)
6300
2291.1
1.3
Equipment Technical Parameters of Startup Standby Transformer

Model
Rated
capacity
Rated voltage
Rated current
SFFZ1040000/154 TH
40000/2500025000/15000KVA
154181.25/6.3-6.3
2291.1A (LV side)
HV line terminal
LI/AC 950/395KV
Load loss
HV neutral point LI/AC 185/85KV

terminal
I.v. line terminal
LI/AC 75/35KV
I.v.
neutral
point LI/AC 75/35KV
terminal
Balance
coil
line LI/AC ?KV
terminal
High - (low 1+low 2) at 220.93KW
50000KVA
High low 1 at 27000KVA
105.21KW
Cross
impedance
Semi-cross
impedance
High low 2 at 27000KVA

High voltage(low voltage 1
LV2)
High voltagelow voltage1
High voltage low 1
Insulation
level
Use condition
Cooling mode
Frequency
Connection
symbol
Numbers of
Phases
Outdoor
ONAF (oil
immersed
natural
cooling)
50HZ
YNyn0-yn0
+d
3
41450kg
111.70KW
9.26
Body Hoisting
weight
Total oil weight
Total weight
20.50
20.44
Upper oil tank

weight
6120kg
- 43 -
22410kg
85930kg
Split
impedance
Noise
Altitude
Product code
Low voltage 1low voltage 2
45.09
75Db(100 cooling mode, 2m distance

transformer body)
(254.85297.76)m
from
Anti
seismic
capability
Manufacturers
Serial number of
Year and month
of Manufacture
Level 10
24A234
2004.12
1XTB.710.3143
Voltage Taps of Startup Standby Transformer

High voltage
Position of
switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9A
9
9B
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1.4
Connection
K+
K-
169400
167475
165550
163625
161700
159775
157850
155925
154000
150
152075
150125
148225
146300
144375
142450
140525
138600
151.9
153.8
155.8
157.9
160.0
162.1
164.3
166.6
Voltage (V)
Voltage (V)
Current (A)
200000
10681
Technical Parameters of LV Auxiliary Power Transformer
Designation
Unit transformer
Electrostatic
precipitation
transformer
Common
transformer
Coal conveying
transformer
Water treatment and
service water
transformer
Lighting transformer
Circulation water
transformer
Lighting standby
transformer
X1-Y1-Z1
X2-Y2-Z2
X3-Y3-Z3
X4-Y4-Z4
X5-Y5-Z5
X6-Y6-Z6
X7-Y7-Z7
X8-Y8-Z8
X9-Y9-Z9
XK-YK-ZK
X1-Y1-Z1
X2-Y2-Z2
X3-Y3-Z3
X4-Y4-Z4
X5-Y5-Z5
X6-Y6-Z6
X7-Y7-Z7
X8-Y8-Z8
X9-Y9-Z9
Low voltage
Current
(A)
136.3
137.9
139.5
141.1
142.8
144.5
146.3
148.1
Specification and Technical Requirements

2000kVA, 6.322.5%/0.4KV
Ud=8%Dyn11
2000kVA, 6.322.5%/0.4KV
Ud=8%Dyn11
Quantity (set)
6
6
2500kVA, 6.322.5%/0.4KV
Ud=10%Dyn11
800kVA, 6.322.5%/0.4KV
Ud=6%Dyn11
1600kVA, 6.322.5%/0.4KV
Ud=8%Dyn11
2
400kVA, 6.322.5%/0.4KV
630kVA, 6.322.5%/0.4KV
Ud=4%Dyn11
Ud=4.5%Dyn11
400kVA, 6.322.5%/0.4KV
Ud=6%Dyn11
Manual for Transformer Operation

The transformers should comply with the technical parameters specified by the manufacturer in
normal operation, and transformers can operate over a long period of time under the technical
- 44 -
parameters specified on the nameplate.

2.1
Manual for Normal Operation Temperatures of Transformers
2.1.1
The maximum permissible value of upper layer oil temperature for oil immersed natural cooling
transformer must not exceed 95, normally not exceed 85. The temperature rise must not
exceed 55.
2.1.2
The upper layer oil temperature of forced oil circulation air cooling transformer must not exceed
75 normally, and the maximum must not exceed 85. The temperature rise must not exceed
55.
2.1.3
The insulation class of insulation system for dry transformer is class F, the temperature rise of all
parts must not exceed 100. The temperature in operation must not exceed 110 normally, and
the maximum must not exceed 130. The average temperature rise of coiling, iron core surface
and structural member surface must not exceed 80K. The ambient temperature is a factor
influencing transformer operation, the load capacity of transformer can be smaller or bigger than
the rated capacity when the yearly average temperature is higher or lower than 20; the
transformer capacity decreased or increased is 0.6% for rising or dropping 1.
2.2
Manual for Transformer Insulations
2.2.1 A transformer, which is installed newly or experienced a overhaul as well as has stopped for a long
period of time (two weeks above), can be put into operation after the winding insulation resistance
and absorption ratio are measured up to standard before it is put into operation.
2.2.2 The insulations of high voltage against ground, low voltage against ground and between high
voltage and low voltage windings should be separately measured when the insulation resistances
are measured; it must be paid attention to that the voltage transformer to be related to the
measurements should be in open position. When one side of winding insulation is measured,
another side of winding should be short circuit and earthed, a discharge against ground should be
adequately carried out after the measurements are completed.
2.2.3 Converting to same temperature and comparing with the last measured results, the insulation
resistance value of oil immersed transformer should not be lower than 40%. Otherwise, the
maintenance personnel should be informed to carry out check and treatment, if necessary, the
medium loss and insulation resistance absorption ratio of transformer should be measured, and the
oil is drawn out for chemical examination to judge whether or not the insulation is satisfactory.
The absorption ratio (R60/R15) should not be less than 1.3 under the condition of 10 to
30, and the results, the upper layer oil temperature and ambient temperature at measurement will
be recorded in a special record book to be convenient for analysis and comparison.
2.2.4 The transformer windings for the rated voltage class 1000V and above will be measured by 2500V
megger, the windings for 1kV and below will be measured by 1000V megger. The winding
insulation resistance values of oil immersed transformer should not be less than specified values in
the following table:
Winding
voltage
class
20~35KV
60~220KV
Insulation resistance values under different temperatures (M)

10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
600
1200
400
800
270
540
180
360
120
240
80
160
50
100
35
70
2.2.5 The insulation of dry transformer will be judged whether or not its insulation is satisfactory in
accordance with a standard not to be less than 1M/KV (operation voltage). A try transformer can
be put into operation after conforming there is no aging with its insulation. The manufacturer must
be contacted when dry transformer windings are affected with damp and needs to treat.
2.2.6 The temperature conversion of insulation resistance can be carried out as per the following
- 45 -
formulae:
Rt1=Rt2k (The temperature is higher than last time at the time of measurement)
Rt1=Rt2/k (The temperature is higher than last time at the time of measurement)
Rt1It is to be converted to the corresponding insulation resistance under the last time of temperature
Rt2: Insulation resistance value measured in this time
t2: Temperature measured in this time
t1: Temperature at the last time of measurement
k: Temperature conversion factors for insulation resistance of oil immersed power transformer are shown
as the table below:
Temperature
difference
Conversion
factor
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.3
2.8
3.4
4.1
5.1
6.2
7.5
9.2
11.2
2.2.7 The insulation resistances of oil submerged pumps and fan motors should be measured by 500V
megger before they are put into operation after a overhaul and a minor repair of forced air cooling
transformer and oil immersed air cooling transformer. The insulation resistance value should not
be less than 0.5 megohm.
2.3
Manual for Normal Operation Voltage of Transformer
2.3.1 The transformer should comply with the voltage value specified on the nameplate in normal
operation. The rated capacity of transformer will not change when the voltage changes in 5% of
relevant tap voltage.
2.3.2 The maximum voltage applied on each tap must not exceed 105% of rated voltage of relevant tap.
When the voltage drops to below 95% rated value, the capacity should be decreased and the
limitation is the rated current not to exceed 105% rated value.
2.3.3 As for a no-load voltage regulating transformer, it is prohibited to change the position of HV tap
changer, if the voltage in the load side of transformer is too high or too low, the position of HV tap
changer needs to change, the maintenance personnel will be informed to carry out change after the
power supply of transformer is cut off and released from the standby state and the safety measures
are completed; the transformer can be put into operation after the switchover is completed and DC
resistances are measured up to standard.
2.4
Operation Instructions for Voltage Regulating Device
2.4.1 Operation Instructions for No-load Regulating Device

A no-load tap changer must be used for changing tap when the transformer does not carry load, it
must be confirmed that the transformer is in power cut state prior to operation.
When a tap is changed, a set screw is at first unscrewed on the hand lever housing, and then the
hand lever housing is moved to make finger aligning to the tap position required, the set screw is
tightened again. If taps for no-load voltage regulating transformer have not been adjusted over a
long period of time, the tap changer should be backwards and forwards turned several times for
changing tap, and then adjusted to the tap required, finally the set screw is tightened.
2.4.2 Operation Manual for On-load Voltage Regulating Tap Changer of Main Transformer and Startup
Standby Transformer
The on-load voltage regulating devices of main transformer and startup standby transformer are
provided with two operating modes: the normal adjustment will be operated by electric remote
control in remote, and it can be operated by electric control in local when the remote control is in
malfunction.
- 46 -
A principle of step-by-step rise and fall should be complied with during the operation of on-load
voltage regulating device, and it is to keep watch the remote indication of position indicator is
consistent with the local indication. No matter whether the position of tap changer in the HV side
is to rise or fall, the rise or fall operation can be carried out after the figure of position indication
on tap changer in the HV side has not changed and after it is checked that the voltage of 6kV
busbar or the generator terminal voltage is steady and the current is normal.
If the electric operating mechanism of on-load voltage regulating device is rising or falling
without cease, the emergency button should be rapidly pressed to cut off the operating power
supply of on-load voltage regulating device; the operating power supply of on-load voltage
regulating device can be switched on at local after it is treated and in normal condition.
It is strictly prohibited to carry out switchover operation of taps when the main transformer and
the startup standby transformer are in serious overload state or there is any fault with the power
grid system.
2.5 Parallel Operation of Transformers
2.5.1
The parallel operation of transformers should meet the following conditions:

Phase sequences are same.
Connection symbols are same.
Voltage ratios are same (5% difference is permissible)
The short circuit impedances are same (5% difference is permissible). Transformers with same
voltage ratio and different short circuit impedance can operate in parallel under the condition of
any one of transformers not to operate with overload. When transformers with different short
circuit impedances operate in parallel, the secondary voltage of transformer with higher short
circuit impedance should be properly increased so as to fully utilize the capacities of two
transformers.
The capacity ratio is not more than 3:1.
2.5.2 If the disorder of phase sequence is likely to arise due to the causes such as newly installation or
overhaul of transformer, the phase sequence and phases should be measured before paralleling or
loop closing operation.
2.5.3 The parallel on and off of transformer should be completed by a circuit breaker. Any knife switch
must not be used for putting a transformer into or out of operation.
2.6
Manual for Overload Operation of Transformer
2.6.1 A transformer is permitted to operate under the conditions of normal overload and accident
overload. It can often operate with normal overload, and the permissible overload time will be
executed as specified; it can only operate with accident overload under an accident condition; the
operation states of the transformer should be closely monitored during the overload operation.
2.6.2 A transformer must not operate with normal overload under the following conditions:
There are defects existed in a transformer, for example: oil leakage, local overheat phenomenon,
weak point existed in insulation etc.
A transformer always operates with full load.
Coolers of a transformer can not be totally put into operation.
2.6.3 The overload of main transformer should correspond with the permissible overload of generator, in
which the stricter one will act as operation basis. The permissible operation time for accident
overload of main transformer is executed as per the following table (in hour):
Multiple of
overload
Upper layer oil temperature before overload ()

10
20
30
- 47 -
40
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
1.60
1.70
2400
2400
1100
345
150
100
030
2400
2100
510
210
110
035
015
2400
800
245
120
040
016
009
1430
330
130
045
016
008
005
510
135
045
015
007
005
0
2.6.4 Overload and permissible operation time of HV auxiliary power transformer are executed as per the
following table
Multiple of overcurrent
Permissible operation time (min)
2.6.5
1.2
480
1.3
120
1.45
60
1.6
45
1.75
20
2.0
10
Overload and permissible operation time of LV auxiliary power transformer are executed as per
the following table
Overload current /rated current

Duration time of overload
(min)
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
60
45
32
18
2.6.6 All coolers of a transformer should be totally put into operation in the case of the transformer
operating with normal load and accident load.
2.6.7 The values and the duration time of overload should be recorded and closely monitored when a
transformer operates with overload; when the upper layer oil temperature or the winding
temperature reach the maximum permissible value, no matter whether the multiple and the
duration of overload reach the specified values, the overload operation of generator should be
stopped to prevent damage accident of transformer.
2.7 Operation of Transformer Cooling Device
2.7.1
Operation of main transformer Cooling Device

The main transformer adopts forced oil circulation air cooling mode. The coolers of main
transformer should be put into operation as specified before the main transformer is put into
operation, and the cooling device must be guaranteed to reliably operate during the main
transformer operates.
There are two power supplies for the forced oil circulation air cooling of main transformer, which
are separately fed from 380V unit section A and B of each unit.
The automatic putting into operation of cooling power supply of main transformer is controlled
by the circuit breaker in the HV side of main transformer. The power supply of coolers will put
into or out of operation along with closing and opening of HV side circuit breaker when the
automatic mode is selected (1K switch is placed in Auto position): the corresponding
quantity of Working coolers preselected can be automatically put into operation while the main
transformer is put into operation in the power grid; all coolers putting into operation can be
automatically switch off when the main transformer is switch off. In general, manual mode is
selected (1K switch is placed in Manual position).
The whole cooler system is equipped with two independent power supplies, one can selected as
working power supply and another can selected as standby power supply in the two power
supplies which can automatically change over (I Work and II Work selected by a changeover
switch). The standby power supply will automatically put into operation when the working power
supply is in malfunction; the standby power supply will be automatically out of operation when
the working power supply resumes; the load of AC contactor can be relieved when two power
supplies are operating to form sectionalized busbar operation; when any working power supply is
- 48 -
out of operation due to a fault, the power supply can be automatically changed over to put the
busbar tie contactor into operation and guarantee continuous operation of the coolers.
The protection elements of oil pumps and fan motors of coolers can effectively prevent oil pumps
and fans from damages resulting from open phase, loss phase, short circuit and three phases
power supply unbalance etc.
2.7.2 Temperature Protection Device of Transformer
The main transformer body is equipped with two sets of signal thermometers and two sets of
winding thermometers. The preset temperature of signal thermometer control switch K1 is 45
which is used for switching off the auxiliary coolers; the preset temperature of control switch K2
is 60 which is used for switching on auxiliary coolers; the preset temperature of control switch
K3 is 85 which is used for signal alarm; the preset temperature of control switch K4 is 100
which is used for trip. The preset temperature of winding thermometer control switch K1 is 65
which is used for switching off auxiliary coolers; the preset temperature of control switch K2 is
80 which is used for switching on auxiliary coolers; the preset temperature of control switch
K3 is 100 which is used for signal alarm; the preset temperature of control switch K4 is 110
which is used for trip.
The HV auxiliary power transformer body is equipped with two sets of signal thermometers and
one set of winding thermometer. The preset temperature of signal thermometer control switch K1
is 45 which is used for switching off fans; the preset temperature of control switch K2 is 60
which is used for switching on fans; the preset temperature of control switch K3 is 90 which is
used for signal alarm; the preset temperature of control switch K4 is 100 which is used for trip.
The preset temperature of winding thermometer control switch K1 is 70 which is used for
switching off fans; the preset temperature of control switch K2 is 80 which is used for
switching on fans; the preset temperature of control switch K3 is 100 which is used for signal
alarm; the preset temperature of control switch K4 is 110 which is used for trip.
The startup standby transformer body is equipped with two sets of signal thermometers and one
set of winding thermometer. The preset temperature of signal thermometer control switch K1 is
55 which is used for switching off fans; the preset temperature of control switch K2 is 65
which is used for switching on fans; the preset temperature of control switch K3 is 80 which is
used for signal alarm; the preset temperature of control switch K4 is 90 which is used for trip.
The preset temperature of winding thermometer control switch K1 is 70 which is used for
switching off fans; the preset temperature of control switch K2 is 80 which is used for
switching on fans; the preset temperature of control switch K3 is 90 which is used for signal
alarm; the preset temperature of control switch K4 is 100 which is used for trip. The fans will
not be started up below 70% capacity and the natural oil circulation cooling is used.
2.8
Operation Manual of Transformer Gas Protection

The valve on the connecting pipe of gas relay should be in open position.
The vent line of gas relay should be in normal working state.
There should be no gas in the gas relay.
The transformer gas protection is set in trip position in normal operation. If it is necessary to
disable the gas protection due to working needs when the transformer is in operation, it must be
approved by a leader in charge of production and reported to the dispatchers, and it is strictly
prohibited that other main protections of transformer are out of operation.
The trip strap of gas protection should be put into operation when a transformer is to put into
operation and charge after it is newly installed or goes through overhaul, the trip strap of gas
protection will be out of operation after the transformer is charged to achieve normal condition.
- 49 -
The air in inside of the transformer will be exhausted after it is charged to normally operate for 48
hours, and the trip strap of gas protection should be put into operation.
The trip strap of gas protection should be out of operation during operation of transformer under
the following conditions, and then the relevant treatments will be carried out:
a). The trip strap of gas protection should be out of operation when oiling and filtering oil of
transformer are being carried out; and it can be put into operation after the workings are
finished and the transformer operates for 48 hours, and inner air has been exhausted.
b). There is work with breather and bursting diaphragm, and the silica gel of oil regenerator is
replaced.
c). The oil circuit part of coolers will be repaired.
d). When the oil level indicated on the transformer oil level gauge unconventionally rises or
there is abnormal phenomenon occurred in the oil circuit system, it is necessary to open each
vent or oil drain plug and valve, and check moisture absorber or carry out other work in order
to find out the causes, then the trip strap of gas protection must be out of operation, and it can
be put into operation after all work are finished and air in the inside of the transformer has
been exhausted.
e). When there is any work on the secondary circuits of transformer gas protection (such as
verify check of gas relay, treatment of DC circuit fault etc.), the transformer gas protection
will be out of operation, and the heavy gas protection is changed to signal, it can be set to trip
after all work are finished.
f). The valve on the connecting pipe of gas relay is opened and closed.
It is strictly prohibited the trip strap of gas protection is out of operation when the oil level
falls (oil leakage, oil impregnate) to result in light gas signal to be send out.
2.9
Manual for Neutral Point Earthing of Startup Standby Transformer
2.9.1Operation of Startup Standby Transformer Neutral Point

The neutral point earthing knife switch must be closed before the circuit breaker of startup
standby transformer is closed or opened.
If the startup standby transformer is to charge as standby, the neutral point earthing knife switch
should be opened after the startup standby transformer is charged to achieve the normal condition.
When the startup standby transformer acts as interlock standby, the neutral point earthing knife
switch of startup standby transformer must be closed. The neutral point earthing knife switch of
startup standby transformer should be opened after the circuit breaker of startup standby
transformer acts by interlock.
2.10 Neutral point earthing resistance cabinet of HV auxiliary power transformer, startup standby
transformer
Insulation Manual of Resistance Cabinet
It is to measure the insulation resistance of primary circuit. The connecting wire is removed
between the tail end of the resistance and the top porcelain insulator of earthing cable, and the
insulation resistance measured by 2500V megameter should more than 1000 M.
Current Transformer of Resistance Cabinet
There are 2 current transformer installed in the bottom of resistance cabinet, 1LH is used for
protection circuit in the control box, and 2LH is used for users protections and measurements.
Startup of Resistance Cabinet Fan
The faceplate of control box is located in the lower side of cabinet, when the switch K1 is
changed over to Manual position, the fan can be started up or stopped by pressing pushbutton
STARTUP and STOP; when the switch K1 is changed over to AUTO position, the fan is in
- 50 -
standby state. When an earthing fault occurs in the 6kV system, the current passed through the
earthing resistance is more than the set point of current relay, LJ acts and the fan will
automatically start up. The earthing current of resistance cabinet earthed can be eliminated after
6kV earthing fault is eliminated or the main circuit breaker of power supply in the relevant side of
transformer trips. LJ overload relay reset, the time relay of the control box starts up. The fan is
continuously operating for a delay time to remove the remaining heat in the control box. The fan
can automatically stop operation and is in standby state after the delay setting value is reached.
The maintenance of resistance cabinet can be carried out only after the transformer is in power
cut.
Checks and Tests of Transformer
3.1 Checks and Tests before Transformer Putting into Operation

All maintenance work permits are taken back. All short circuit wires and earthing cables should
be removed in the primary circuit, all earthing knife switches should be opened, all standing
fences and nameplates are set up as specified, doors of transformer rooms are locked and are
provided with good illumination.
There is no short circuit and earthing phenomenon in the primary circuit and the phase sequence
is correct.
The equipment markings and symbols should be visible and correct.
Oil color, oil level and oil temperature in the oil conservator and bushing should be normal
without oil impregnate and oil leakage.
The stop valves of gas relay, radiator and oil regenerator should be opened.
Check that HV and LV bushings are in good condition, the transformer pressure release device is
complete and the breather silica gel color is normal. All connections of lead wires, busbars and
bushings of transformer should be tight and in good condition.
The position of tap changer is correct, and the regulating device of on-load voltage regulating tap
changer should be complete and flexible.
All insulations measured for all parts of transformer are qualified. The insulations can not be
measured when the outage time of outdoor transformer does not excess 48 hours, and the outage
time of indoor transformer does not excess 15 days, and there is no reason to possibly reduce
insulation to be found. But checks must be carefully carried out. The insulations must be
measured after an overhaul of transformer is finished.
As for a unit wiring transformer which can not be separated with the generator, the insulations of
this transformer can be measured along with the generator, but short circuit and earthing should
be applied in the HV side of the transformer before measurement in order to avoid the effect of
induced voltage in the HV side. If the measurement results do not conform to the specified
requirements, the measurement will be carried out after the transformer is separated from the
generator; the transformer can be put into operation only after the reasons have been found out
and it resumes to normal condition.
There is no hangover on the top and the current carrying part of transformer.
The earthing cable of transformer shell is in good condition.
The power supply of cooling device is in good condition.
The motor of cooling device is normally running, and there is no abnormity of the signal and
electrical elements in the cooler control box.
The inlet and outlet oil butterfly valves of each set of cooler are in open position.
The rotation direction of oil submerged pump is correct and there is no abnormal sound and
obvious vibration in the operation, the temperature rise of motor is normal, and the action of oil
- 51 -
flow relay is normal.

The cooling device of transformer should be put into operation before the transformer is put into
operation. All cooling devices of forced oil circulation cooling transformer should be put into
operation to remove residual air before the transformer is put into operation after overhaul, repair
of cooling device, oil replacing, oil filtering of the transformer. The auxiliary coolers and standby
coolers will be stopped as specified after 1 hour.
All relay protection devices, control circuits and straps and miniature switches of a transformer
should conform to the operation requirements. The transformer protections should be put into
operation in accordance with the commands of dispatchers.
There should be written instructions for putting the transformer into operation after a transformer
overhaul is carried out.
It is to be checked the ventilation is good in LV auxiliary power transformer room; there are
measures for preventing foreign matters entry at air inlet and outlet of transformer cabinet.
Check whether the indications for oil thermometers and winding thermometers of transformer
body conform to the actual condition, and the indications will be check against BTG panel / CAT
values.
There is no other factor threatening the safety operation of transformer.
3.2
Check of Transformer in Operation

Oil level and oil color of transformer should be normal without oil impregnate and oil leakage in
all parts.
Transformer sound should be normal in operation, and there is no noise and discharge sound in
the inside of transformer.
Transformer oil indication is normal, and the temperature rise is in the specified range.
The radiator, breather, oil regenerating device normally operate, and the pressure relief valve is
normal.
The bushings are complete without flashover discharge phenomenon.
The oil level of gas relay is normal, the connecting oil valve is in open state, and there is no air in
the gas relay.
There is no severe vibration with fans and oil pumps in operation; there is no abnormal sound and
overheat phenomenon with motors; the rotary speed is normal; and the oil flow relay operates
normally.
There is no overheat phenomenon with the all lead-in connection cables and busbars, and there is
no oil leakage with cables.
There is no overheat in all parts in the control box of cooling device, and all hand level positions
conform to the requirements of operation mode.
The doors and windows in transformer rooms are complete, the ventilation is good, the lighting is
normal, the fire fighting devices are complete, there is no water leakage in the room and the room
temperature is normal.
The ventilation is good in the dry transformer cabinet, and there is no hot air detained in the space
on the top of transformer.
3.3
Special Check of Transformer

The lead wire should not acutely swing in strong wind, the transformer bushings should not loose
and there is no foreign matter on the top cover and in surrounding
The oil level change and the operation of cooling device should be checked when the air
temperature is very cold and very hot.
- 52 -
It should be checked that there is no flashover discharge on all parts and there is no die burn,
rupture trace after heaven fog and thunder storm.
The snow melting should be checked in heavy snow to judge whether there is overheat, and
Check whether there is any icicle to be likely to give rise to flashover on porcelain insulator.
A light-off check should be carried out at night there is no any heating and red-hot phenomena
with all connections, and there is no discharge phenomena with bushings.
The transformer body should be immediately checked after the gas relay acts.
3.4
Check Items for Dry Transformer

The temperature measuring devices of transformer are in good condition, and the temperature
indications are normal.
Shell temperature, color, smell, noise and vibration of transformer are normal.
The transformer cooling fans are normally operating.
The front and rear door sheets and fences of transformer are in good condition.
There is no dirt retention on the outside surface of transformer.
There is no water leakage or other abnormal phenomena of endangering safety around
transformer.
The transformer, which is put into operation after newly installation or overhaul, should be
checked once every hour in 3 hours after putting into operation; and then the check times should
be properly increased in 72 hours after putting into operation; finally the normal check will be
resumed.
Patrol check and check times should be increased when there is any defect in the transformer and
in high temperature season and during peak load; the operation state of transformer should be
uninterruptedly monitored and checked.
Transformer Putting In or Out of Operation
4.1 Transformer Putting Into Operation

4.1.1
Checks should be carried out as specified in clause 2.3.1 before a transformer puts into operation.
4.1.2
Closing and tripping test of circuit breaker should be normal before a transformer puts into
operation; protection transmission test should be carried out and be normal when there is working
in the protection circuits.
4.1.3
The circuit breaker in the power supply side (normally it is HV side) should be closed at first, and
then the circuit breaker in the load side (normally it is LV side) when a transformer is to put into
operation.
4.1.4
A transformer newly installed or after overhaul should carry out impact closing test in accordance
with the following conditions:
All protections of the transformer are set to trip.
The neutral point earthing knife switch of the transformer must be closed in the neutral point
earthing system when the impact closing is carried out.
Full voltage impact closing can be carried out when the transformer is first put into operation, and
the circuit breaker in the power supply side of transformer is used when the impact closing is
carried out.
The first power-on duration of the transformer should not be less than 10 minutes, it is to be
checked there is no abnormity.
The transformer should carry out 3 times of impact closings without abnormity (each interval is 5
minutes); the excitation surge current should not lead to action of protections.
- 53 -
It should be checked the phase sequence and phase position are coincident and conform to the
parallel operation conditions to prevent the auxiliary power transformer seriously exceeding rated
current before the transformer parallels on.
All parts should be checked to operate in good condition after the transformer is in power on.
4.2 Transformer Out of Operation
4.2.1 The load carried by the transformer should be transferred or stopped in advance in accordance
with the unit operation conditions before the transformer power cut.
4.2.2 The circuit breaker in the load side should be switched off at first, and then the circuit breaker in
the power supply side can be switched off when the transformer power cut.
4.2.3 The circuit breaker in the LV side should be switched off at first, and then the circuit breaker in the
HV side can be switched off when a LV auxiliary power transformer is out of operation.
4.2.4 Safety measures are arranged in accordance with the tasks and working requirements of overhaul.
Abnormal Operation and Accident Handling of Transformer
5.1 A transformer must immediately stop operating when the transformer occurs one of the
following conditions.
There is very big and abnormal noise and explosive sound in the inside of the transformer.
The transformer temperature abnormally and continuously rises under a normal load and cooling
condition.
Oil spouts out from conservator and pressure releaser.
The oil level falls due to serious leakage, and lower than the lower limit of oil level gauge.
Oil color changes greatly, carbon occurs in oil.
There is serious damage and discharge phenomenon on bushings.
Lead wire terminal burns.
Transformer catches fire.
5.2 When a transformer takes place one of the following conditions, it is permitted to outage after
reporting; if the condition is permissible, the standby transformer can be changed over.
There is abnormal sound in the transformer and there is ascending trend, but there is no discharge
sound.
Insulation oil becomes dark colored, cloudy, and viscosity and acidity are increased after
chemical examinations.
Cracks and oil impregnate appears on bushings, there are discharge phenomenon and discharge
trace.
Cracks of aluminum busbar, broken strand of lead wire or heating and discoloration of lead wire
terminal occur.
There are serious oil leakages in cooler and oil valve gland packing as well as welding zone of oil
pipe.
There is foreign matter endangering safety on the top of transformer and they can not be removed
without power cut.
The transformer oil temperature and winding temperature abnormally rise while the transformer
load, ambient temperature and cooling conditions do not change.
The on-load voltage regulating device is in malfunction which can not be handled without power
cut.
All main protections of transformer are out of operation.
- 54 -
5.3 Transformer Overload

If a overload of the main transformer occurs, it is reported to the dispatchers and the load is to be
limited; when the permissible overload duration time and the permissible sundries of a LV
auxiliary power transformer are exceeded, the load can be transferred; if the overload results from
the external short circuit, it is a short circuit overload and the fault should be rapidly cut off. The
overload duration time for main transformer, HV auxiliary power transformer, HV standby
transformer, LV auxiliary power transformer will be executed as specified in this Manual,
meanwhile, it is to be paid attention to and checked the transformer cooling system normally
operates.
5.4 Transformer Temperature High
5.4.1 Oil Immersed Transformer Temperature High
Check the local thermometer and compare with DCS parameters, if the temperature measured
point is not normal, the maintenance personnel should be immediately informed to handle.
Check whether the operation of transformer cooling system is normal, and the standby coolers are
properly started up to reduce the oil temperature.
Immediately check the load of transformer, and synthetically analyze the reasons of High Oil
Temperature, and go to the field to check the transformer body, verify whether or not the High
Oil Temperature alarm is correct.
When it is confirmed that the transformer temperature is abnormal rise, the transformer load
should be properly reduced and the oil temperature change should be observed.
If the transformer oil temperature continuously rises after the abovementioned measures are taken,
the load should be immediately switched over to other transformer, and the operation of
transformer will be stopped, and it should be reported to the shift supervisor.
If the upper layer oil temperature of main transformer exceeds 75, and the upper layer oil
temperature of HV standby transformer and the HV auxiliary power transformer exceeds 95,
the conditions should be immediately reported to the shift supervisor.
5.4.2 Dry Transformer Temperature High
Go to the transformer body to check, and verify the High Temperature alarm is correct.
Check whether the ventilation is good in the transformer cabinet, whether or not the cooling fans
of transformer is automatically started up, whether or not the intake is blocked up and ensure the
ventilation is in good condition in the transformer cabinet.
Examine whether or not the high temperature results from the indoor temperature to be high, if
yes, the indoor ventilating fans should be started up to keep good ventilation.
If it results from the heavy load of transformer, the load of this transformer should be transferred
and reduced so as to reduce the temperature.
If the temperature is abnormal rise or it is doubted that the transformer exists fault, the load
should be transferred to other transformers, the operation of this transformer should be stopped.
5.5
Handling for Transformer Gas Protection Action
5.5.1
Causes and handling of Transformer Light Gas Signal Send out
5.5.1.1 In general, there are following causes for light gas protection action:
Due to oil filtering, oil filling or cooling systems are not tight, air invades in the transformer.
Due to the temperature decreases or oil leakage, the oil level falls to below the lower limit.
Due to transformer fault, a small quantity of gas is generated.
Due to secondary circuit fault, signal is falsely send out.
- 55 -
5.5.1.2 Solution
It is reported to the shift supervisor, and check whether the transformer oil level is normal,
whether or not there is any oil leakage, whether or not there is any rupture and oil injection
phenomena on the explosion stack and bushings, whether or not the pressure relief valve acts.
Check whether there is any earthing in the DC system and there is any fault in the secondary
circuits (for example, the insulation of lead wire of gas relay is not undesirable).
The operation of the transformer should be closely monitored, for example, changes in current,
voltage and sound etc. and the transformer load should be properly reduced, at this moment, the
heavy gas protection must not be out of operation.
Check whether there is any gas in the gas relay, if yes, the chemical personnel should be informed
to sample for analysis, the gas color will be observed and the gas bleeding and ignition test will
be carried out, the sampling will be executed in accordance with the working requirements in
Safety Manual; if the gas is flammable or yellow, it proves it is oil quality or insulation fault,
and the results are reported to the shift supervisor and an application for transformer outage will
be filed.
If the intervals between two consecutive signals send out gradually shorten, it should be reported
to the relevant leaders, and transformer should be switched over, and the transformer with fault
should be stopped to inspect in detail.
If the heavy gas protection is set to the signal position and the action signal is send out (there is
drop), transformer should be immediately switched over, and the fault transformer should be
stopped; when the signal sends out and it is found that the transformer current is abnormal at the
same time, this transformer should be immediately stopped.
5.5.2 Handling for Gas Protection Action to Trip
As for main transformer and HV auxiliary power transformer, it will be handled as per the
generator-transformer unit accident handling Manual: check whether the standby power supply
has been put into operation, if not, check the LV side circuit breaker of HV auxiliary power
transformer has been reliably opened, if there is no lock signal of quick switchover device, the
standby power supply can be forcedly put into operation one time to ensure the normal power
supply of the auxiliary power system. If the standby power supply putting into operation is
unsuccessful, it is prohibited to put into operation again.
Check whether the temperature and oil level of the transformer tripped are normal, and there is
any oil injection on explosion stack and other position.
A gas sample chromatoraphic analysis and oil quality chemical examination as well as oil
withstand voltage test will be carried out, if there is any problem to be found, the transformer
must not be put into operation.
If there is no problem to be found after the abovementioned check, analysis, chemical
examination, the maintenance personnel should inspect the gas protection and its DC secondary
circuit. If it is confirmed the gas protection is false action, the gas protection will be out of
operation, the maintenance personnel will inspect the reasons of false action, other main
protection of the transformer will be put into operation and the operation of this transformer
resumes.
If the gas protection and differential protection act at the same time, and there is flammable gas
by checking, the transformer is forbidden to put into operation without test to be qualified.
The gas protection acts to trip, if it is verified it is caused by human error, the transformer can be
put into operation at once after there is no abnormity by appearance inspection.
5.6 Handling for Transformer Differential Protection Action
5.6.1 The transformer can not be forcedly power on after the differential protection acts; the standby
- 56 -
transformer can be put into operation when there is a standby transformer.

5.6.2 If the differential protection acts, and the gas protection of this transformer acts at the same time,
there is impact to the power grid system or obvious fault phenomenon is found by inspecting, the
transformer should be power cut, and further inspections and treatments will be carried out.
5.6.3 If the differential protection acts, there is no impact to the power grid system, and the gas
protection does not act, the equipments in the protection range should be checked, if there is any
abnormity to be found, it will be treated as per the following principles.
The relay persons are informed to inspect the differential protection and secondary circuits, if it is
false action or there is any problem in the secondary circuits, the differential protection should be
out of operation, whether or not the transformer putting into operation is decided by the chief
engineer.
If there is no problem to be found by inspecting, after the transformer insulations are measured and
the direct current resistances are normal, and the chief engineer approves, the transformer voltage
can be raised from zero, and it must make sure the three phase currents should be zero; it should
remain one minute when the voltage is raised to 105% rated voltage, and then the voltage falls to the
rated value after it is checked there is no abnormity, and the transformer has been put into operation
over again. If the transformer voltage can not be raised from zero, the transformer can be charged
one time after approved by the chief engineer, it can be put into operation after the charge is normal.
5.6.4 If the trip results from human error, the transformer can be put into operation without inspection.
5.7 Handling for Transformer Overcurrent Protection Action
5.7.1 If HV auxiliary power transformer branch overcurrent, compound overcurrent section I, standby
branch overcurrent protections act, no matter whether MFC (quick switchover device of auxiliary
power) acts, this 6kV busbar section must not be power on. This busbar can be power on only after
the 6kV busbar fault has been eliminated or the load which results in the trip by skipping a grade has
been isolated, and the insulations are measured up to standard.
5.7.2 If the instantaneous current protection of an auxiliary power transformer trips, no matter whether
the standby power putting into operation is successful by interlock or manual operation, the working
transformer must not be forcedly put into operation.
5.8 A Mass of Oil Leakage of Transformer
Transformer is immediately switched over, and it should be informed to the maintenance personnel
to handle.
Main transformer obviously leaks, it should be informed to the maintenance personnel to
supplement oil or handle.
Oil leaks due to cooler broken, measures should be taken to handle as soon as possible.
If there is no effect after handling, it should be reported to the shift supervisor to stop the fault
transformer.
5.9 Handling for Transformer Catching Fire
All sides of power supplies should be rapidly switched off.
The standby transformer is put into operation.
The cooling device of the transformer is stopped.
If the fire is on the top of transformer, the oil drain valve should be opened to discharge oil, and the
oil level is lower than the fire level. If the fire is caused by the inside fault of transformer, the oil can
not be discharged to prevent explosion of transformer.
The fire fighting will be carried out in accordance with the fire fighting Manual, it is informed to the
fire department and reported to the relevant leaders.
- 57 -
If a mass of oil leaks due to the explosion stack bursts or the pressure releaser acts for large scale of
transformer, the fire fighters should keep away from the transformer in order to prevent explosion of
the transformer.
- 58 -
Chapter IV Distribution Device Manual

1
Equipment Specification of Distribution Devices
1.1 Technical Parameters of HV Sulfur Hexafluoride Circuit Breaker for ZF9-252/Y4000-50 Gas
Insulation Metal Enclosed Switchgear (GIS)
No.
1
2
3
Item
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated current
Unit
kV
Hz
A
Technical Parameter
252
50
3150
kA
50
50%
kA
kA
kA
kA
kA
A
ms
ms
ms
V
times
50
125
125
IK90%; IK75%
IK25%
160
1.5
O-0.3s-CO-180s-CO
50
25
100
>40guaranteed by
user
300
4
2
1
Split pole operating or three
poles electrical interlock
60
500
5000
times
20
MPa
0.5
0.5%
150
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Short
circuit
current
Direct
current
component percent
Rated short-time withstand current4s
Rated peak withstand current (peak value)
Rated short-time closing current (peak value)
Near zone fault breaking current
Out-of-step breaking current
Rated line charging breaking current
First pole to clear factor
Rated operation sequence
Breaking time
Rated opening time
Rated closing time
16
Close-open time
ms
17
18
19
20
Open-close time
Inter-pole closing synchronism
Inter-pole opening synchronism
Quantity of fractures for each pole
ms
ms
ms
Pcs.
21
Operating mode
22
23
24
Main circuit resistance of each pole

Radio disturbance voltage
Mechanical life
Electrical life under the rated short circuit
breaking current
Rated SF6 gas pressure (20)
Permissible yearly leakage rate of SF6 gas
Acceptance value
Water content of SF6
Permissible
gas
operation value
25
26
27
28
Rated short circuit

breaking currentI K
ppm
(V/V)
29
Operating mechanism used
30
Reference standard
- 59 -
300
CYA3- type hydraulic spring
operating mechanism
GB1984 and IEC60056
1.2
Rated Insulation Level

No.
1
3
4
5
1.3
Designation
Unit
Between
fractures
Dry, wet
Against
ground
Between
Rated lightning impact withstand voltage fractures
(peak value)
Against
ground
Between
5min zero gauge pressure power frequency fractures
withstand voltage (effective value)
Against
ground
1min power frequency withstand voltage of auxiliary circuits
1min interturn withstand voltage AC of opening and closing
coil
Parameter
395+145
1min power frequency

withstand
voltage
(effective value)
kV
460
950+206
kV
1050
1.3252/
kV
1.3252/
2
2.5220/110
SF6 Pressure Parameters (at 20)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Item
Rated pressure
Gas filling alarm pressure
Gas filling alarm release pressure
Circuit breaker lock pressure
Circuit breaker lock release pressure
Unit
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
Technical Parameter
0.50
A=0.450.03
A1=A+0.010.05
L=0.400.03
L1=L+0.010.05
1.4 Parameters of Control Circuits and Auxiliary Circuits

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1.5
Item
Control voltage of opening and closing
coil
Opening coil current
Closing coil current
Supply voltage of motor
Power of motor
Voltage
Heater
Power
Unit
Data
Remarks
DC110/220
A
A
V
W
V
W
3.06/1.43
3.06/1.43
DC220/AC220
660
AC220
100
--
Technical Parameters of ZF9-252/Y4000-50 GIS Isolating switch

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rated voltage
Rated current
Rated frequency
Rated short-time withstand current
(effective value)
Rated peak withstand current (peak
value)
Rated power frequency withstand
voltage (effective value)
Rated lightning impact withstand
voltage (peak value)
Rated SF6 filling pressure (20)
SF6 leakage rate
Insulation level
kV
A
HZ
220
3150
50
kA
503 s
kA
100
kV
460 1min
kV
1050
MPa
% year
- 60 -
kV
0.4
1
Against ground 460 1min
11
12
13
14
15

Model of operating mechanism
Mechanical life
Rated control voltage
Rated voltage of motor
Voltage of Heater
kV
Against ground 1050
times
V
V
V
Electric
3000
DC110
AC220
AC220
1.6 Technical Parameters of Overhaul Earthing Switch Used for ZF9-252/Y4000-50 GIS
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
Item
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
(effective value)
value)
SF6 leakage rate
Insulation level
Mechanical life
Voltage of Heater
Unit
kV
HZ
Technical Parameter
220
50
kA
50 3 s
kA
100
kV
460
1min
kV
1050
MPa
%year
0.4
1
kV
Against ground
460 1min
kV
Against ground
Times
V
V
V
Electric
3000
DC110
AC220
AC220
1050
1.7 Technical Parameters of Fault Closing Earthing Switch Used for ZF9-252/Y4000-50 GIS
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
Item
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
(effective value)
value)
SF6 leakage rate
Insulation level
Mechanical life
Unit
kV
HZ
Technical Parameter
220
50
kA
40 3 s
kA
100
kV
kV
MPa
% year
kV
kV
times
V
V
- 61 -
Against ground 460
1min
Against ground 1050

0.4
1
Against ground 460
1min
Against ground 1050

Electric spring
3000
DC110
AC220
14
Voltage of Heater
AC220
1.8 BANTEN 2300MW CFSPP Station

The main busbar adopts three phases integrated box type structure, and the branch busbar adopts
three phases split box type structure, and the parameter are as follows:
Rated frequency 50Hz
Rated voltage 220kV
Rated current 4000/3150A
Rated short-time withstand current3s 50kA
Rated lightning impact withstand voltage (peak value) 1050 kV
Rated short-time power frequency withstand voltage (1min effective value)
Voltage against ground 460kV
Rated SF6 gas pressure 0.40MPa.
1.9 Technical Parameters of Voltage Transformer JDQX8-150ZHA1
Maximum voltage of equipment 170kV
3 kV
Rated primary voltage
150/
Rated secondary voltage
a0.1/
b0.1/
3 kV; 0.1/ 3 kV; 0.1 kV.
3 kV; 0.1/ 3 kV; 0.1/ 3 kV; 0.1 kV.
Accuracy class combination
a)0.2/0.5/3P.
c)0.2/0.5/3P/3P.
Rated output
a)100/100/100 VA
d) 50/100/100/50 VA
1.10 Technical Parameters of Enclosed Busbar
Model:
QLFM- 24/12500
Rated voltageKV
24KV
27.6KV
Maximum working voltageKV
Ambient temperature:
-40 to +40
Altitude:
1000m
Earthquake intensity:
8 degree
Permissible temperature of maximum hot
50K
point of busbar conductor
Permissible temperature rise of maximum hot
30K
point of shell:
Temperature rise of maximum hot point of conductor contact surface
(contact surface silvered) connected by bolts:
Dimension of busbar conductor
1050
Dimension of busbar shell:
500
Distance between phases:
L=1400mm
1.11 Micro Positive Pressure Device of Enclosed Busbar
Rated input air pressure
Air pressure in busbar shell
Rated air filling flow
5~7100 kPa
5002500Pa
35m3 / h
- 62 -
60K
1.12 Technical Parameters of Branch Circuit Enclosed Busbar

Model:
QLFM- 24/1600
24KV
Rated voltageKV
27.6KV
Maximum working voltageKV
Ambient temperature:
-40+40
Altitude:
1000m
Earthquake intensity:
8 degree
Permissible temperature of maximum hot 50K
point of busbar conductor
Permissible temperature rise of maximum hot 30K
point of shell:
Temperature rise of maximum hot point of conductor contact surface
(contact surface silvered) connected by bolts:
Dimension of busbar conductor
700
Dimension of busbar shell:
150
Distance between phases:
L=1000mm
60K
1.13 Detailed Parameters of Micro Positive Pressure system

1)
Dryness of output air (outlet dew temperature):
2)
Outlet air pressure: 300Pa 2500Pa
3)
Outlet pressure of air compressor: 0.4Mpa-0.7Mpa
4)
Pipe diameter of air inlet: G1/2, pipe dimension of air supply opening: G1/2
5)
Power supply: AC380V
6)
External dimensions 800(W) 1200HX600(L)
50Hz (three-phase four-wire system)
1.14 Excitation transformer, generator neutral point grounding transformer, risistance and current
transformer
Model number
ZSCB9-3600/20
DC-35/20/0.22
ZX-20
Type
Dry type excitation

transformer
Generater neutral
point grounding
transformer
Generater
neutral point
grounding
resistance
AN
50Hz
3600kVA
AN
50HZ
35KVA
Yd11
Single phase
8.09
5.66
103.9/2309.4A
Cooling mode
Rated frequency
Rated capacity
Code of the
connecting unit
Short circuit
impedance
Rated current of
the high and low
sides
Rated voltage of
the high and low
sides
Temperature rise
2
2.1
LZZBJ9-10C20
Generater
neutral point
grounding
current
transformer
50HZ
55KW
30VA
1.8/159.1A
500A
5/5A
20/0.9KV
20/0.22KV
220V
100k
100k
Operation and Maintenance of Distribution Devices

General Manual for Distribution Devices
The distribution devices in this Manual include busbar, switch, knife switch, PT, CT, lightning
- 63 -
arrestor, wave trapper, coupling capacitor, conducting wire, cable, distribution board etc.
The phase sequence of each circuit of distribution devices should be consistent. Indoor hard wires
and outdoor busbar bridge should apply phase color paint, phase A is red, phase B is yellow and
phase C is blue.
Designations and codes of equipments should be respectively marked on the distribution boards,
compartment doors or equipment shells of distribution devices.
Shells of all equipments of distribution devices should be reliably earthed.
All cable inlet and outlet holes, cable through-floor and wall holes for outdoor distribution
devices should be covered and sealed off; vent holes on doors of distribution devices and
windows should be provided with measures preventing rain, snow and sand entry, and fences
preventing beasties.
Outdoor distribution devices should be equipped with lock device and interlock device to prevent
electrical error operation accidents.
In order to avoid joint oxidation resulting in contact resistance rise, the normal temperature must
not exceed 70 at the joint of knife switch and wire, and the connection of wires and cables; the
normal operation temperature of copper and aluminum wire should not also be higher than 70.
The rated current of transformer device must not be exceeded in the normal operation, otherwise,
the operation mode should be changed or the operation load should be reduced.
There must not be open circuit in the secondary side of current transformer, and a short circuit is
not permitted in the secondary side of voltage transformer.
It is permitted that a withdrawable switch trips with voltage after the electric operation failure, but
it should make sure there is no fricative sound of vacuum damaged in advance.
A record should be made after the circuit breaker switches off the fault current, and the equipment
should be checked in detail at the same time, if any defect of equipment is found, it should be
informed to maintenance personnel to handle.
Lightning arrestors on a busbar must be out of operation before the withstand voltage test of the
busbar is carried out.
Any working must be prohibited on the earthing cables of lightning arrestors, or inside the fences
of arrestors in thunder storm.
2.2
Patrol Inspection of Contribution Devices

Doors and windows are closed in the distribution room, the lighting is adequate, cable holes are
blocked tightly, and the fences on doors and windows are in good condition to preventing beasties
entering.
The cover plates of cable trenches are complete.
The wire connecting parts and the equipment joints contact well, there is no screw looseness and
overheating phenomena with wires and joints, there is no broken wire and broken strand
phenomena.
Porcelain insulators and bushings are clean without damages, cracks, flashover traces and
discharge phenomena.
There is no leakage with oil filled equipment, and the oil color is clear, there is no foreign matter
in oil, and the oil level is normal.
There is no noise and discharge sound with circuit breaker and instrument transformer; the there
is no looseness and dropout phenomenon on the instrument transformer secondary wire terminals.
The operating mechanisms of circuit breaker and isolating knife switch are in good condition
without broken damage phenomenon, and there is no break and dropout phenomenon of pin.
- 64 -
There is no rust and burn phenomenon on the contact heads of isolating knife switch; the contact
heads contact well without overheating phenomenon.
Cable sheaths are complete; there is no oil leakage and discharge phenomenon on the contact.
Earthings of equipment shell are in good condition.
No pressure low alarm for SF6 pressure occurs; operation and startup and stop of oil pumps are
normal.
All heating devices for all operating boxes in 150kV step-up station are normal, and can normally
switch on and switch off according to the specified temperature, and the doors of operating boxes
and terminal boxes should be closed tightly.
The indications of signal and position indicators are normal.
There is no break on generator enclosed busbars with micro positive pressure; there is no seeper
in the gas tank of enclosed busbars.
2.2.1 Special check items for distribution devices:
1It should be checked in strong wind day whether or not there is any violent swing of busbars
and lead wires of all parts, whether or not the connecting parts become loose, whether or not
there is any foreign matter brought by strong wind all around;
2There should not be abnormal discharge and flashover, burn trace and rupture phenomena on
all porcelain insulators and bushings in fog and rain day;
3The sag of lead wires and tensile force of connecting wires should be checked in high air
temperature, whether or not the oil level of equipment is too high or too low;
4The distribution room should be checked in heavy rain day whether or not there is any water
leakage;
5The relevant equipments should be checked in detail when equipment takes place abnormity
or fault.
2.2.2 Check after circuit breaker fault trip
1Whether or not there is any obvious fault in the outside of the circuit breaker, for example,
crack and damage on support insulators, fracture insulators and capacitor insulators etc.
2Whether or not there is any leakage phenomenon of SF6 gas; whether or not there is any
capacitor oil flowing out.
3Whether or not signals Three Phases Asynchronization and Non-All-Phase Operation occur
at accident opening; the relevant equipments will be considered as important objects to inspect
according to the fault and the signals.
2.3
Normal Operation and Maintenance of Cable

2.3.1 The surface temperature of cable does not exceed 60 in normal operation.
2.3.2 The normal operation voltage of cable should not exceed 15% of its rated voltage.
2.3.3 Overload of cable is permissible at accident, but the following rules should be complied with:
1) Cable below 1kV is only permitted with 10% overload to continuously operate 2 hours;
2) 6kV cable is only permitted with 15% overload to continuously operate 2 hours;
3) The normal load immediately consumes when the overload time is over;
4) The interval of intermittent overload must be 12 hours above, and the next overload can be
permitted.
2.3.4 Normal check items of cable:
- 65 -
1) The cover plate of cable should be completely put on;

2) There should be no seeper or foreign matter in the cable trenches;
3) No goods can be pile on cables;
4) The cable head should be complete and clean without discharge or oil leakage, overheating,
discoloration, burned taste etc.
5) Cable earthing wire should be in good condition without looseness, breakage and dropout
phenomenon, the sheath is not damaged, and the cable temperature should not exceed the
permissible value.
The temperatures of several cables used in parallel should be same, if there is obvious difference,
tong tester should be used to measure the current distribution, if the current distribution is
unbalanced, it should be reported, and the cable with the maximum current should not exceed the
permissible value.
2.4
Operation Maintenance of Isolating Knife Switch and Busbar

2.4.1 The loads which are allowed to be cut off by isolating knife switch are as follows:
1) Opening and closing of voltage transformer.
2) Opening and closing of lightning arrestor without thunder and lightning.
3) Opening and closing of no-load busbar.
4) Opening and closing of neutral point earthing knife switch of transformer.
5) Opening and closing of no-load transformer with excitation current 2A and no-load line
with capacitance current5A.
2.4.2 The closing of knife switch should be correct and rapid and decisive, but there must not be
excessive impact at the end of closing. In case false closing or closing on fault circuit occurs, the
closing operation should be fully completed and the knife switch can not be opened.
2.4.3 The opening of knife switch should be slow and cautious, it must be paid attention whether or
not there is any abnormal arc to produce at the moving contact and static contact just separating
during opening operation, if yes, and the knife switch must be immediately closed.
2.4.4 The isolating knife switch should be locked after operations are completed, and the operation
conditions should be carefully checked, the moving contacts and the static contacts should contact
well and should not deflect, or the contact surface is too small;
2.4.5 The permissible temperatures of knife switch and busbar are 70, there should not be
overheating phenomenon in operation.
2.4.6 Check and requirements after knife switch and busbar overhaul:
1) Withstand voltage tests are qualified (or insulation resistances are qualified);
2) All joints are complete and clean, the closing positions are appropriate, contacts are good, and
operations are flexible;
3) All screws of joints are tightened and in good condition.
4)Driving rods are in good condition, pins do not drop out, auxiliary contacts are in good
condition, and positions are correct.
5) All insulations are clean without crack and scratch;
6) There is no object and foreign matter to obstruct operation all around;
7) Markings such as designation and code of equipment should be correct and clear.
2.4.7 Check of knife and busbar in operation:
1) Insulators are clear without crack and discharge phenomenon;
- 66 -
2) All contacting parts are tight without looseness and overheating phenomenon, without
abnormal noise and metal fitting vibration phenomenon;
3)
2.5
Driving bars and pins are in good condition, and position indications are correct.
Operation and Maintenance of Instrument Transformer

2.5.1 A short circuit can not occur in the secondary circuits of voltage transformer during operation,
and load can not be carried without control; a open circuit can not be occur in the secondary circuits
of current transformer;
2.5.2 Checks and requirements after overhaul of voltage and current transformers
1) They are qualified by testing;
2) Eathing points should be connected well, there is no foreign matter to obstruct operation, all
parts are clean without oil leakage, and oil level and color are normal;
3) Screws of all parts are tight without looseness; there is no abnormal phenomenon on bushing
such as crack;
4) HV fuses of voltage transformer are complete and contact well;
5) Secondary wirings of current transformer are in good condition, open circuit must not occur;
6) Phase positions of secondary circuits are correct.
2.5.3 Check items of voltage and current transformer in normal operation:
1) Oil level and oil color are normal without oil leakage;
2) Bushings are clean without crack and discharge phenomenon;
3) There is no overheating phenomenon for all joints, earthing wire should be complete and in
good condition, screws of all parts are tight without discharge phenomenon.
4) There is no abnormal noise or transformer electromagnetic sound in current transformer;
2.6
Operation and Maintenance of Lightning Arrestor

The insulation resistance can not be measured when a lightning arrestor is to come back operation,
but it can be put into operation only after it is tested and compared with leak current up to
standard by the test personnel.
All arresters are put into operation in all year.
Bushings are clean without crack and spark discharge phenomenon.
There is no looseness and discharge phenomenon with connecting wires.
Earthing wires are firm without looseness.
Arresters should be carefully checked after thunderstorm whether or not there is any flashover
trace on the outer bushings, there is any discharge sound in the inside of arrestors, whether or not
the discharge recorder has acted.
2.7
Operation and Maintenance of Enclosed Busbar

A leakage test of enclosed busbar should be carried out and qualified after overhaul, the actual air
leakage and ideal air leakage ratio should not exceed 4% per hour, if unqualified, the soapy water
will be used for looking for leakage point (handled by maintenance personnel).
Check the air supply device is in good condition, the control power supply is put into operation.
The air supply temperature should not be lower than 20.
The air source valve of the air supply device is opened to supply air to the enclosed busbar; this
dry air is used for evicting humid air in the enclosed busbar.
The dry air can be cut off after it circulates in enclosed busbar for 15 to 24 hours, and the water
drain cap and plug should be resumed. (The dry air must circulate 24 hours in enclosed busbar
- 67 -
after overhaul, other will depend on circumstances)

The air source of enclosed busbars should keep 0.7MPa pressure after the generator parallels on.
Enclosed busbars should usually operate to keep in micro positive pressure (300 to 2500Pa), and
the pressure is automatically regulated.
1) Air supply will be automatically carried out when it is lower than 300Pa.
2) Air supply will be automatically stopped when it reaches 1500Pa.
3) The safety valve will act (discharge air) when it reaches 3500Pa.
4) The rated air injection amount of automatic device is 25.2m/h.
5) If automatic control is in malfunction, the pressure in the enclosed busbars should be manually
controlled in 300Pa to 2500Pa, and the maintenance personnel will be informed for handling.
2.8
2.8.1
Operation and Maintenance of Trolley Type Switchgear

Patrol Inspection
Smoking is prohibited inside rooms; a hot work must handle a hot work permit.
Lock management are applied to distribution rooms where any person must not freely pass in and
out. Non operator who needs entering this area to work must handle a work permit, and will be
guided to enter into this area by the supervisor.
Electrical or I&C personnel must be specified to supervise installation and maintenance workings
carried out in the distribution rooms. The supervisor must strictly carry out supervision on site
and must not freely leave after handling work permit.
Check that lightings are adequate in distribution rooms, if lamps are damaged, the maintenance
personnel should be immediately informed to replace.
Check whether air conditionings are normally operating, the room temperature must not be higher
than 35. If higher than this temperature, the room temperature must be decreased by all
possible means.
Check whether there is any water leakage in room, and it must ensure there is enough dryness
inside distribution rooms.
There must not be ash deposit and dust deposit on the protection panels and the ground must be
kept clean in distribution rooms.
Check that fans of panels and cabinets runs well, all cabinet and panel doors are closed to avoid
dust entering into the panels and cabinets.
Check that the fire fighting facilities and equipments are adequately prepared and in good standby
state.
It must be checked that each door is locked to prevent other persons entering when leaving
distribution rooms.
When the work permit is finished, the working personnel must go to the site for inspecting, and
Materials and field must be cleaned up after a working is completed, each door of room must
be lock in time.
Patrol inspection items of trolley type switchgear
1)
Operators must not make bold to open the back cover board of switchgear.
2) The back cover board must be closed well, the sight glass must be clear, lighting is adequate,
and bulbs are in good condition.
3)
Contact heads contact well without overheating phenomenon.
4)
Micro computer protection control device is normally put into operation, and the values
- 68 -
displayed are correct, protections are put into operation as specified.

5) The break phase indicator lights of the red, yellow, and blue three-phase fuse are normally
on.
6) The opening and closing state indicator lights are on and conform to the equipment
operation state.
7) Check that the energy storage indicator light is in good condition and the energy storage
switch is put into operation as required.
8) It is to be checked the selector switch of control mode has been correctly put into operation
as required.
9)
10)
2.9
2.9.1
The protection straps have been put into operation as specified.

Active curtain board has closed in correct position.
Operation Manual for Auxiliary Power 6KV System Vacuum Switch and Vacuum Contactor
(F-C Circuit Switch)
Vacuum switch trolley and F-C circuit switch trolley meets the following interlocks
An interlock, which is located in the trolley chassis to prevent trolley moving, can be unlocked
and the trolley can depart from the work position or open position/test position only when the
circuit breaker on the trolley is in open state.
The electrical control circuits on the trolley can switch on only when the trolley is locked on the
open position/test position or work position, at the same time, the interlock located in the trolley
chassis to prevent circuit breaker closing can be unlocked, the circuit breaker can be closed.
The electrical closing circuit and closing mechanical driving system of circuit breaker are locked
and the circuit breaker can not be closed when the trolley is placed in the middle (move) position.
An interlock preventing the closing of switchgear earthing switch by trolley can be unlocked only
when the trolley is in open position /test position or drawout position, here the earthing switch of
switchgear can be closed.
The interlock structure on the operating shaft of earthing switch will obstruct the trolley moving
when the earthing switch is in closed state, so that the trolley can not be put into the work
position.
The secondary plug can be inserted in and pull out only when the trolley is in open position/test
position.
The secondary plug can not be pulled out after the trolley apart from the open position/test
position, during putting into the work position and after reaching the work position.
The lower door of switchgear or the back blanking plate of cable chamber can be opened only
when the earthing switch is in closed state. The earthing switch can be opened only when the back
blanking plate of cable chamber is closed in.
After the F-C circuit switch shuts off primary short circuit current, an external inspection of the
switch should be carried out, Check whether the fuses are blown, same size and type of fuses
should be replaced after the fuses are blown, other type must not be used.
2.9.2
Auxiliary Power 6kV Switchgear

A switch newly installed or after overhaul must carry out one time of open-close test in the test
position before it is put into operation. The switch with abnormal operating mechanism is
prohibited to put into operation.
Under normal condition, the switch of 6kV power load is strictly prohibited to carry out
open-close operation in the local switch room (including open-close test). Switches are permitted
to manually trip under the following condition:
- 69 -
1 The switch fails to electric trip.

2 A serious personal and equipment accident occurs.
6kV withdrawable switch is normally not permitted to interchange. In case a withdrawable switch
fault occurs and it is necessary to supply power to the equipment, a same type and same capacity
of standby withdrawable switch can be replaced after the maintenance personnel confirm the
standby withdrawable switch is in good condition and it can match with the switchgear, but the
switch equipment nameplate must be replaced, and the defect of fault switch should be eliminated
in time.
The insulation (between sheath and wire, between wire and wire) resistance value of LV circuit of
switch should not less than 1M/kV relative to the rated voltage.
The permissible ambient temperature of switchgear is -15 to +40, the maximum daily
average temperature: +35.
The indoor air should be clean, the relative humidity should not exceed 90% at temperature
+25, the dew generated every once in a while due to temperature change should be paid
attention to mitigate. 6kV switchgear is provided with temperature and humidity controllers
which should be put into operation in normal condition.
Positions and functions of 6kV withdrawable switch
1 Work position: The primary circuit and secondary circuit of switch are switched on, and
the switch is in working state
2 Test position: The primary circuit of switch is apart from the system, it can carry out
operating function test.
3 Repair position: The primary circuit and the secondary circuit of switch are switched off,
and in isolated and power cut state
Before a switch is placed in test position and repair position, it should be checked that the switch
is in open position, the mechanical trip device of the switch body acts flexibly and there is no
blockage phenomenon when it is drawn out.
Before withdrawable switch is put into the test position and the work position, it should be
checked the earthing knife switch is in open position, there is no blockage phenomenon when
putting in, and there is no foreign matter on the switch body.
The back door of switchgear is strictly prohibited to open for carrying out work when the
withdrawable switch is in work position.
Before the earthing knife switch is operated, it should be checked the switch has been drawn out
to the repair position or test position, and the back door of switchgear is in closed position.
2.10
Manual for Check and Operation of GIS Combined Electrical Equipment
2.10.1 Normal patrol inspection items of GIS combined electrical equipment: whether or not the position
indication of switch, knife switch, earthing knife switch conform to the actual conditions.
Whether or not all signal indications of local control cabinet on site and the position of control
switch are correct, and whether or not the signal relay has acts. Whether or not indications of
various pressure gauges are normal; whether or not there is any leakage of SF6 gas and hydraulic
system; whether or not there is any damage and rust for all kinds of pipes and valves in which the
opening and closing position are correct. Whether or not the indication value of action counter of
lightning arrester takes place change. Whether or not there is any overheating on the external
incoming line terminals, and whether or not there is any crack and damage on the insulators.
Whether or not there is any abnormal noise or peculiar smell. Whether or nor there is any rust and
damage on shells and supports; whether or not the earthing is in good condition; whether or not
all kinds of box doors are closed tightly. Whether or not the ventilation system is in good
- 70 -
condition.
2.10.2
Manual for GIS Combined Electrical Equipment in Normal Operation

In addition to comply with the general safety work rules, it should pay attention to the
characteristics of SF6 gas in operation of GIS device: first, SF6 gas and its electric arc
decomposed matter can leak to pollute environment and endanger personal safety; secondly, the
contact potential harmfulness can be caused in equipment internal fault or operation
In order to prevent SF6 gas deposited in low-lying place to result in anoxic asphyxiation accident,
operators should open ventilating fans for 15 minutes before they patrols equipments and the
maintenance personnel enters into the working site.
Operators should record the SF6 gas pressure and ambient temperature of each gas chamber of
GIS combined electrical equipment in each patrol inspection. If they find any abnormal leakage
phenomena such as gauge pressure drop, pungent smell, feeling unwell in the patrol inspection,
they should handle as per the safety protection Manual of SF6 chamber leakage.
The pressure parameter of each gas chamber of GIS combined electrical equipment in operation
should conform to the requirement specified.
2.10.3
Operating Manual of GIS Combined Electrical Equipment

In normal operation of GIS combined electrical equipment, the switch and electric knife switch
must use remote operating mode, and it must be checked whether or not the position signal of
equipment is correct after operating. The operation on the local control cabinet can only be used
in equipment maintenance or special condition. When the GIS combined electrical equipment is
operated, anybody must stop the work on the equipment shell and apart from the equipment till
the operation is over. Operators should wear insulation gloves and keep a specified distance from
the equipment when the earthing knife switch is manually operated.
There are electrical locking devices for operating circuit of each switch and knife switch of GIS
combined electrical equipment, if obstructions occur in operation, it is considered whether or not
the locking device is normal. See anti-misoperation device section for specific lock logic.
In order to avoid error closing operation of earthing knife switch in 150kV line with power on, it
should be checked in site that the line voltage transformer has truly been in power failure and
there is no indication on leaking current meter of line arrester after the switch and the isolating
knife switch are opened by remote control, and then it is verified by dispatchers, afterwards, the
closing operation of line earthing knife switch can be carried out.
2.10.4
Accident and Abnormal Operation of GIS Combined Electrical Equipment

If any abnormal condition is found in patrol inspection such as gauge voltage drop, abnormal
sound, pungent smell etc, it should be reported to the dispatcher and the working section
management, the causes must be found out and relevant measures must be taken.
When SF6 pressure drop alarm occurs, the pressure on pressure gauge and gas chamber should be
immediately checked on site to make sure whether or not there is leakage, if a mass of leakage are
found, it should be reported to the dispatcher to apply for power cut to handle.
When SF6 pressure of switch drops to below the lock value and the switch is in open-close lock
state, the switch should be immediately changed to non-auto mode and it should be reported to
the dispatcher and the working section management, and waiting for instructions to handle.
When GSI device accident results in gas leakage, personnel will not be permitted to freely enter
into the site, at first, all ventilating devices should be switched on for ventilation, gloves and gas
mask must be worn and protection clothing must be put on for entering into the site.
2.10.5
Acceptance Items after Overhaul and Installation Test of GIS Combined Electrical Equipment
GIS combined electrical equipment normally only carry out minor repair and does not carry out
overhaul. A minor repair will be considered only when it operates over a long period of time (10
- 71 -
years above) or the times of trip operations resulting from accident, serious abnormal and fault
exceed the times specified. The normal minor repair period is once per biennium. In addition to
execute the contents of electrical and mechanical characteristics as well as preventive test for the
relevant equipments, the following contents will be carried out in the minor repair:
2.10.6
a)
The water content of SF6 gas should conform to the Manual in the slug test.
b)
The leakage test standard is leakage rate per year<1%.
Acceptance items of GIS combined electrical equipment:

a) Installation should be fixed and firm, appearance is clean and complete, and the acting
performance conforms to the Manual.
b)
Leakage rate and water content of SF6 gas should conform to the Manual.
c) The interlock device of combined electrical equipment and its drive mechanism should be
normal without blockage phenomenon, the open and close indications are correct, and the
secondary contacts and electrical locking device should correctly and reliably act.
d) Alarm and locking setting values of density relay equipped should conform to the Manual,
and signals act correctly.
e) The incoming line power-on display device should be able to reliably lock the quick
earthing knife switch of incoming line.
f)
Paint is complete, phase color markings are correct, and the earthing is in good condition.
g)
Open - close test (including remote operation) is qualified.
h) Electrical test report is qualified, records are complete and there is conclusion for being
able to put into operation.
3
3.1
Abnormal Operation and Accident Handling for Switchgear

General Principle of Accident Handling
Prevent an emergency from evolving into an accident, eliminate the causes and relieve threat
against personnel and equipments.
Take all possible actions to ensure normal operation of the auxiliary power supply systems.
Take all necessary actions to ensure that other equipments sustain normal operation, adjust the
unit output if necessary to guarantee power supply to users, provided that the provisions on
generator overload protection are observed.
Restore power supply to users as soon as possible.
Adjust the operation modes to restore normal operation.
During accident handling, operators must be present at their posts and rapidly execute orders
issued by shift supervisors to accomplish the above tasks. Operators are allowed to leave their
posts and stop equipment operation only when the shift supervisors issue an order to do so or
persons and equipments are in danger
3.2
Accident Handling Procedures

Determine the nature and scope of emergency situations based on instrument indication, actions
of protections and automatic devices, tripped circuit-breakers and visual examination.
It is necessary to take all necessary measures to relieve any threat against persons and equipments,
and stop equipments if necessary. If the equipments dont constitute a threat against persons and
equipments, immediately restore normal operation. Isolate normal equipments from failure
equipments, and start up standby equipments if necessary.
Perform inspection and tests immediately to investigate equipment damage and impact upon
power plant operation, inform the management and maintenance personnel on a timely basis, and
- 72 -
take safety precaution for repairing failure equipments.

During accident handling, operators must report the situations and each response stage to shift
supervisors rapidly, accurately and briefly. The following information need be reported:
3.3
1)
Circuit-breakers tripped conditions;
2)
Action of protections and automatic devices;
3)
Change in system frequency, voltage and load;
4)
Equipment damage;
5)
Other phenomena associated with emergency situations.
In case of any of the following emergency situations, operators may firstly deal with it and
then report to the shift supervisors:
Power failure which will cause direct threat against life;
Isolate damaged equipments.
Cut off power supply to equipments which may be damaged;
In case of busbar voltage loss, open the circuit-breakers of synchronization lines connected to the
busbar if power recovery is possible.
In case of total or partial loss of auxiliary power, restore auxiliary power supply.
3.4
Manual on Accident Handling

In case of emergencies, only persons, plant leaders, department leaders and engineers
participating in accident handling are allowed to be present at the control room and other persons
should leave the site.
In case of emergency situations involving the power system, operators should rapidly execute all
orders issued by dispatchers and report the execution to dispatchers.
In case emergency situations only involve the power plant, operators should rapidly and correctly
execute the orders issued by shift supervisors and foreman and report the execution to them on a
timely basis.
If it is expected that an order will endanger the safety of persons and equipments, operators
should refuse to execute such order, report the reasons to the relevant leaders and keep records.
In case of communication failure, the priority should be given to the safety of power plant
equipments. System demand for power supply should be satisfied if possible, in accordance with
the Manual on system voltage and frequency as well as dispatching Manual.
During accident handling, the system of attendance and read-back should be strictly abided by.
Dont take hasty action.
Emergencies which occur during shift handover should be dealt with by handing-over operators.
In this case, taking-over operators shall coordinate with handing-over operators. Relief of a shift
can be carried out only after accident handling has been basically completed.
A person shall be assigned to keep various records, including operation of relaying protection and
automatic devices, phenomena, various indications, sequence and execution time for various
orders and load recovery time. The relevant signals can not be restored until making records.
After accident handling is completed, the shift supervisors and foreman shall keep records of
accident handling to analyze the causes.
3.5
Accident handling to abnormal system frequency

The system frequency should be 50HZ0.2HZ.
When the frequency is smaller than 49.8Hz, operators should immediately increase the active
power output to the maximum value so that the system frequency is greater than 49.8Hz (without
- 73 -
waiting for dispatching orders). If the system frequency is still lower than 49.8Hz after the units
has operated at the rated power output, operators should report to dispatchers.
When the system frequency sharply decreases due to power grid failure, the low frequency
protection of the units will be triggered and the circuit-breakers at the outgoing end of
generator-transformer unit will be tripped. In this case, auxiliary power supply systems will be
changed over to sustain normal operation of turbines, generators and boilers. Operators should
immediately contact dispatchers and prepare for synchronization with power girds.
When the frequency is higher than 50.2 Hz, operators should report to the shift supervisors and
adjust the load according to the actual situation of the power plant. If the load adjustment deviates
from the daily load curve, contact dispatchers on a timely basis.
3.6
Accident Handling to Abnormal System Voltage

The allowable variation of 150kV system voltage is specified by the provincial dispatch center.
The busbar voltage should be maintained in the range of the variation specified by the dispatching
center.
When the busbar voltage is higher than the specified value, adjust generator excitation (generator
under-excitation operation and under-excitation degree shall be determined according to the result
of under-excitation operation tests) so that the busbar voltage is again within the normal range.
Adjustment made on generator excitation should ensure that the auxiliary 6kV and 380V system
voltage are normal and the temperature at generator parts is normal.
When the busbar voltage is lower the specified value, increase the generator inactive power
output. If the system voltage is excessively low, it is possible to apply for decrease in active
power output so that the inactive power output of the generator can be increased. However, the
generator stator current should not exceed 105% the rated value.
If a low busbar voltage endangers normal operation of the auxiliary equipments, operators may
change over auxiliary power to 30 startup/ standby transformer to adjust auxiliary power voltage.
If it is impossible to maintain the auxiliary power voltage, report to the shift supervisors.
3.7
Power system oscillation

(1). Phenomenon
1The generators, transformers and lines experience sharp and periodic oscillation;
2The generators and transformers issue abnormal and rhythmic roars which are synchronous
with the oscillation of the above-mentioned parameters;
3The conveyed power of interconnection tie between two power grids which are out of
synchronization experience oscillation.
4A significant frequency difference between two systems (power plants) which are out of
synchronization exists. The frequency rises at the supplying end and drops at the receiving. In
addition, the frequency slightly varies.
5The generator and busbar voltage swing periodically. In general, the voltage will drop. The
maximum voltage fluctuation appears at the oscillation center and the voltage drop to zero
periodically. In the areas far away from the oscillation center, the voltage fluctuation also occurs
and lamps twinkle alternatively. In general, the forced exciters of the power generating units
close to the oscillation center will be triggered.
(2). Solution
1In case of system oscillation, whether frequency rise or drop, the operators of concerned
power plants should disable the AGC device, increase inactive power output of generators,
make use of their overload capability and raise system voltage even if dispatchers dont issue an
order to do so. The maximum allowable generator voltage is 22kV and the voltage of 150kV
- 74 -
busbar should not exceed 165kV.

2Operators of power plants which frequency drops should immediately increase the active
power output to the maximum value and make full use of the reserve capacity and overload
capacity of the units to raise the frequency without waiting for dispatching orders.
3 Operators of power plants which frequency rises shall immediately decrease the frequency
by decreasing the active power output until the oscillation disappears. However, the frequency
should not be lower than 49.5Hz and normal power supply from the auxiliary power supply
system should be guaranteed.
4If the oscillation results from connection with asynchronous units, operators should
immediately disconnect the unit from power grids.
5 When generator under-excitation operation or a high power factor results in
out-of-synchronism, operators should immediately reduce active power output and increase
excitation current so that the unit resumes synchronous operation without waiting for
dispatching orders. If such attempt failed, disconnect the units from the systems, inspect the
units and allow the units to be connected with the systems as soon as possible.
6If loss-of-excitation occurs in an operating unit, but loss-of-excitation protection is not
triggered or loss-of-excitation results in system oscillation, power plant operators should
immediately disconnect the units from power grids even without dispatching orders.
7In case of system oscillation, the plant operators should not disconnect the units from power
grids unless otherwise specified in accident handling Manual. When the frequency is low
enough to impair normal operation of the auxiliary power supply system, the plant operators
should disconnect the auxiliary power supply system and some load from the systems according
to the established auxiliary power supply assurance measures. It is prohibited to disconnect the
units by opening the generator terminal circuit-breakers. When system oscillation disappears
and the frequency is normal again, the plant operators should allow the unit to be connected
with the power grids.
3.8
Busbar failure
After busbar voltage loss occurs, the operators should immediately report to dispatchers, open all
circuit-breakers on the busbar and rapidly restore the affected auxiliary power supply.
If voltage loss results from malfunction of one of the two busbar protections, turn off the failure
protection and then restore busbar operation.
If two sets of protections are triggered and the system undergoes a surge during emergencies, it is
necessary to investigate the cause and eliminate failures. The operators should raise voltage from
zero with the approval of the plant leaders. If all is right, apply for resuming busbar operation to
dispatchers.
If busbar voltage loss results from circuit-breaker failure protections, open the blade switches on
the both sides of the failure circuit-breakers, disable the failure protection and then supply full
voltage to the busbar.
Before power supply recovery, it is necessary to thoroughly check busbar and equipments
connected with it no matter which reason causes busbar voltage loss.
3.9
Line tripped
a)
Phenomenon
An audible alarm is activated.
The green lamp is flashing and the indication on meters is zero.
The associated protective functions of the microprocessor-based protections for tripped line are
triggered and reclosing may occur.
- 75 -
The disturbance recorders are triggered.

b)
Solution
Report to shift supervisors, check protection and reclosing action and circuit-breaker body.
If the reclosing action fails, it is not allowed to manually close circuit-breakers again.
Manually close the circuit-breaker once if SINGLE-SHOT reclosing is set and reclosing fails
after single-phase tripping. In this case, it is unnecessary to check synchronization. In case of
three-phase tripping, the operators should wait for the orders.
Immediately check whether the line is live if TRIPLE-SHOT reclosing is set and circuit-breaker
fails to reclose. If the line is live, manually close the circuit-breakers after obtaining approval of
shift supervisors. In this case, it is necessary to check synchronization. If the line is dead, the
operators should deal with the emergencies following the orders.
Immediately close the circuit-breaker once if GENERRAL-SHOT reclosing is set and
circuit-breakers fails to recluse after single-phase tripping. Don't manually close the
circuit-breakers again if such attempt fails. If it is a three-phase tripping and circuit-breakers fail
to recluse, check whether the line is live or not. If YES, immediately connect the units with power
grids. If NOT, the operators should wait for orders.
Thoroughly check circuit-breakers on the failure line.
Reset and record the signals
The following should be recorded:
1)
Time when the circuit-breakers are tripped;
2) Action of the protection and automatic devices (including indications on alarm window
and devices etc)
3.10
3)
Change in meter indication at the time of tripping;
4)
Other information about accident handling
SF6 Circuit-breaker refusal to trip

a)
Phenomenon
After a trip switch is operated, the red lamp is flashing and the indication on ammeters does not
change.
b)
Possible causes
The operating voltage is too low and the SF6 pressure is lower than the block value.
Abnormal changeover of operating handle contacts, abnormal changeover of carriage circuit
breaker's auxiliary contacts, loose connection of auxiliary contacts.
Operating power cables are loose or fuses are blown.
Tripping coils are burnt or broken.
c)
Solution
Reset.
If the operating voltage is excessively low, immediately adjust it to the normal value. In case of
emergencies, withdrawable switch may be manually tripped.
In case of the failure of operating power source, check and repair operating power source.
If the tripping coils or iron cores are failure, inform the maintenance personnel.
3.11 Lower Gas Pressure in SF6 Circuit-breakers
When the pressure drops to the alarm value due to SF6 leakage, a Low SF6 Pressure alarm will
be generated, but the opening circuit and closing circuits will not be blocked. In this case, inform
- 76 -
the relevant personnel to make up SF6 gas and keep the record of gas makeup.
When the pressure continues to drop to the block value, the closing circuits and opening circuits
will be blocked and an Operation Prohibited due to Low SF6 Pressure signal will be issued. In
this case, the circuit-breakers can not perform opening or closing operation. If impossible to
recover a normal gas pressure, report such situation to shift supervisors and allow the
circuit-breakers to be out of service after obtaining the approval of dispatchers.
In case of significant SF6 leakage, take appropriate measures to protect maintenance personnel
against toxic gas. Otherwise, anyone is at least 5 m away from the leaked circuit-breakers and
stay upwind.
3.12
SF6 Circuit-breaker Failure to Close

a)
Phenomenon
After operating closing switches or buttons, the alarm horn sounds, the green lamps of the
circuit-breakers is flashing and no indication is given by the meters.
b)
Possible causes
The circuit-breaker is not ready for synchronous closing, or the synchronizer is not put into
operation as required, or thermal conditions required for closing of auxiliary closing circuits are
not met.
No energy is stored in the circuit-breakers, SF6 pressure is lower than the block value or other
closing conditions are not met.
The operating power is unavailable, operating circuits or closing contactors have broken wire.
The closing power fuse is loose or blown or the closing coil is burnt or broken.
Changeover of circuit-breaker's auxiliary contacts is failure, the plugs of withdrawable switches
are not properly inserted or loose connection of withdrawable switch's position contacts exists.
The operating mechanisms are damaged or pins are missed.
After the circuit-breakers are tripped, the protection is not reset and therefore the tripped signal
still exists.
c)
Solution
Operation and audible alarm reset.
Check whether the synchronizer is correctly put into operation and the synchronization conditions
are met;
If the operating voltage is excessively low, adjust the DC system voltage.
Check whether the operating and power fuses are in good order or blown. If the circuit is OK,
replace the fuses with a new one and then close the circuit-breaker.
Check whether the auxiliary contacts and position contacts of the circuit-breakers can perform
changeover properly and the plugs of withdrawable switches are normally plugged.
Check the operating and closing circuits for loose terminal connection, damaged coil or broken
wire, etc.
If the closing coil can be normally energized, the mechanical parts may be failure. In this case,
inform the maintenance personnel.
3.13
On-load closing isolators or closing isolators with earthing conductor

After an isolator is incorrectly closed, it is not allowed to immediately open it in any case. It is
necessary to firstly open the circuits using a circuit-breaker before opening the isolator.
3.14
ON-load opening isolators

If the isolator has been opened, it is prohibited to immediately close it. It is allowed to re-close
- 77 -
the isolator only after the circuit-breakers are opened.

Immediately re-close the isolator if operators find isolators to be incorrectly opened when the
moving contacts dont separate from fixed contacts or separate slightly from fixed contacts, and
the isolator is slowly opened,
3.15
Blown PT fuse
a)
Phenomenon
The indication on voltmeters is abnormal, indicating that voltage circuits may have broken-wire
signal. An earthing signal may appear if the fuse on the HV side of the PT connected in y0/y
manner is blown.
b)
Response
Accurately record the exact time when the fuse was blown. Disable the relevant protection and
automatic devices with the approval of shift supervisors. Inform the relevant departments (avoid
misjudgment resulting from meter failures), investigate the cause and replace the fuse. If the new
fuse is also blown, dont continue to replace the fuse, but investigate the extract cause and report
to leaders.
3.16
Open circuit of CTs secondary side

a)
Phenomenon
The ammeters and wattmeter provide abnormal indication, the protective CTs may signal that
there is a broken wire in current circuit, and the CTs may issue hum or smoke appear.
b)
Response
Disable the relevant protection and automatic devices with the approval of shift supervisors.
Inform the relevant departments (to avoid misjudgment due to meter failure), take appropriate
safety measures and attend short-circuited secondary side. If impossible to correct the problems,
stop the CTs on a timely basis.
3.17
Immediately disable PTs and CTs in case of any of the following conditions.
The fuses on PTs HV side are continuously blown;
Extremely overheated, sign of oil or smoke and burnt odour;
Crackling sound or other noises are issued from inside PTs or CTs.
Spark discharge exists between leads and enclosures.
The PT or CT enclosures are broken and seriously leaky.
3.18
Lightning arrester failure

If the protections fail to operate in case of explosion or breakage of lightning arrester housing or
discharging into ground, open all power circuit-breakers connected to the lightning arrester
systems with the approval of shift supervisors. Restore the operation of lightning arresters after
eliminating such failures.
In case of any of the following conditions, open the power circuit-breakers and treat the lightning
arresters
4
4.1
1)
There are cracks on arrester bushings;
2)
The connecting wire or earthing conductors are loose or not connected.
3)
Electric discharge occurs on porcelain insulators or bushing
Accident handling to auxiliary power supply system failure

General principle of accident handling
If HV auxiliary transformers are tripped, check whether the standby power supply of 6kV busbar
- 78 -
is interlocked. If NOT, it is allowed to manually force supplying power once. If certain branch
circuit-breakers are tripped due to overcurrent protection of LV branches of HV auxiliary
transformers, it is prohibited to force supplying power to this branch busbar no matter whether
standby power supply is interlocked or not. It is allowed to supply power to the busbar only when
failures have been eliminated (isolated) and the result of insulation resistance is acceptable.
6kV busbar voltage loss: if standby power circuit-breakers are tripped again after the operation of
rapid changeover devices or manual forced closing circuit-breakers, never force supplying power
to the busbar again in any case. Investigate the causes, eliminate (or isolate) failure points,
measure the insulation resistance and finally restore power supply to the busbar.
380V busbar voltage loss: If the cause is a failure of LV auxiliary transformers, it is allowed to
supply power to 380V busbar using bus-tie circuit-breakers after the transformers are suitably
isolated. If you are uncertain that the busbar has failed, don't supply power to the busbar using
bus-tie circuit-breakers to prevent failures from becoming more serious.
4.2
Total loss of auxiliary power

a)
Phenomenon
The noises suddenly change inside the computer rooms and all rotating machines are tripped.
Normal lighting is totally lost and emergency lighting systems are put into operation
The generators, turbines and boilers are tripped;
b)
Response
Immediately start diesel-engine generators and recover power supply to the protective section.
Pay close attention to DC system busbar voltage, battery discharge and UPS system operation;
Pay close attention to generator sealing oil pressure, and reduce hydrogen pressure if necessary to
prevent hydrogen leakage;
Investigate and isolate the failure points as soon as possible.
Contact dispatchers to restore the operation of the startup/ standby transformers if the
transformers and their channels are normal.
Report to dispatchers, restore the operation of 150kV systems via the tie line as soon as possible,
and firstly restore the operation of the single busbar if necessary.
Restore the operation of 6kV and 380V busbar sections which don't failure, as soon as possible;
Immediately start the unit once it is ready for startup, and allow the tripped units to be connected
with the systems as soon as possible.
Keep and submit the relevant records to leaders.
4.3
6kV busbar failure

a)
Phenomenon
An audile alarm is activated and the system undergoes a surge.
The operating power circuit-breaker in failure section is tripped and a green lamp is flashing.
The standby operating power circuit-breaker in failure section is closed and then tripped and a
green lamp is flashing.
The voltage of the failure section is zero and the relevant protection is triggered.
b)
Response
Reset audible alarms
Make the rapid auxiliary power changeover device out of service;
Investigate the operation of the protections.
- 79 -
Restore power supply to 380V busbar which power failure results from 6kV busbar failure;
If the busbar section is obviously failure, release it from the system and inform the maintenance
personnel. Restore power supply to the busbar after it has been repaired and the result of
insulation measurement is OK.
If no significant busbar failure is found, open all isolators of the section and measure the
insulation resistance of busbar. If the result of the measurement is OK, energize the busbar.
Measure the insulation resistance for each load branch. Supply power to such load branch if the
insulation resistance complies with the requirements. If NOT, inform maintenance personnel.
After 6kV busbar becomes normal, change over 380V auxiliary power supply system to normal
mode.
4.4
Damage of 6kV withdrawable switch

Immediately cut off the DC operating power of the circuit-breaker to prevent it from tripped.
Report to shift supervisors to reduce turbine and boiler load, change over to standby equipments
of another busbar, de-energize 6kV busbar at which the failure circuit-breaker is located, rapidly
remove the failure circuit-breaker and restore the original operating mode.
Inform maintenance personnel so that the failure circuit-breakers are repaired or replaced.
4.5
Tripping of Miniature Switches on 6lV PT Secondary Side

a)
Phenomenon
An audile alarm is activated and the signal 6kV PT Failure or Low Voltage is sent.
The signal MFC Rapid Changeover Device Blocked is issued.
b)
Response
Disable the rapid MFC changeover device of the busbar section;
Deactivate the low-voltage protection;
Check the PT locally;
Close the miniature switches on PT secondary side;
After the alarm condition disappears, enable the low-voltage protection
Put the rapid MFC changeover device of the busbar section into service;
4.6
Automatic circuit-breaker tripping

a)
Phenomenon
The alarm horn sounds;
The green lamp on circuit-breakers tripped is flashing;
The indication on ammeters is zero;
An alarm signal is issued
b)
Solution
Start up the standby circuit-breaker to ensure the unit operation;
Check for correct protection operation. If the protection is triggered due to circuit-breaker failures,
deal with the failures according to the relevant Manual.
If the protection malfunctions, inform the testing personnel. After the circuit-breaker are adjusted,
repaired or replaced, allow it to be put into service.
If it is a circuit-breaker failure, inform maintenance personnel to deal with it and perform tripping
and closing tests. If all is in order, the circuit-breaker should be put into service.
If the problem is due to incorrect operation by local operators, the circuit-breaker may be
- 80 -
immediately put into service without the need for inspection.

4.7
Circuit-breaker Refusal to Close

a)
Phenomenon
The horn sounds;
The green lamp on the circuit-breaker is flashing;
b)
Solution
Isolate the failure by pulling circuit-breaker to TEST position and performing operation test.
Check whether the closing conditions exist and the circuit-breakers are correctly operated;
Check for the circuit-breaker operating power and correct power voltage;
Check for intimate contact between secondary inserts and broken wire in secondary circuits;
Check for normal spring energy storage and free movement of closing mechanisms;
If operators are not able to investigate the cause of trouble or to correct the problem, inform
maintenance personnel
4.8
Circuit-breaker Refusal to Open

a)
Phenomenon
There is not significant change in the reading on the meters (ammeters and voltmeters)
The red lamps on the circuit-breaker are steady on.
b)
Solution
Check for correct operation;
Check for the availability of operating power source and broken wire in secondary circuits;
Check the contacts of the switch used to operate circuit-breakers;
Check whether the operating mechanism is jammed or not;
If remote operation fails, manually operate electrical opening buttons or mechanical opening
buttons locally after obtaining the approval from shift supervisors.
If both remote and local electrical operation fails, it is strictly prohibited to open the
circuit-breaker by pulling the carriage by hand. In this case, report the trouble to shift supervisors.
Open the upstream power circuit-breakers in case of emergencies. Perform such operation after
transferring the load on the busbar section if possible.
Cut off power supply to the failure circuit-breakers and inform maintenance personnel for
inspection and repair.
4.9
Circuit-breaker Failure to Close

a)
Phenomenon
The horn sounds;
A momentary current surge exists during closing circuit-breakers
The lamp turns red and then the green lamp is flashing
b)
Solution
Check for the operation of the protective devices. If failure conditions exist, check and correct the
failures depending on the failure equipments.
In case of incorrect operation of the protection, inform testing personnel.
Check the closing mechanism by withdrawing the circuit-breaker to the TEST position and
performing operation tests. If the operators are not able to eliminate the trouble, inform
- 81 -
maintenance personnel.
4.10
380V busbar failure

a)
Phenomenon
An audile alarm is active and the system undergoes a surge.
The operating power circuit-breaker in failure section is tripped and a green lamp on the
circuit-breakers is flashing.
The voltage of the failure section is zero and the relevant protection is triggered.
b)
Solution
Reset the audible alarms
Investigate the operation of the busbar protections.
Immediately go to busbar rooms and check for any visual failure.
If impossible to isolate or eliminate the failure quickly, allow other busbar sections to take over
power supply to the MCC which power is previously supplied by the failure busbar section (it is
necessary to firstly cut off the original power supply and then connect with the standby power
supply).
After a failure is located, release the busbar from standby state and inform maintenance
personnel.
If no significant failure is found, open all isolators of the section and measure the insulation
resistance of busbar. If the result of the measurement is OK, energize the busbar using service
circuit-breakers. Measure the insulation resistance for each load branch. Supply power to such
load branch if the insulation resistance complies with the requirements. If a problem is found,
inform maintenance personnel.
4.11 Broken 380V Voltage Circuit

a)
Phenomenon
An audile alarm is active and the signal 380V Voltage Circuit Broken is issued.
The indication on the voltmeters mounted on the LV auxiliary power control panel is abnormal;
b)
Possible causes
The primary or secondary circuits of PTs have broken wires;
The 380V auxiliary PT failure;
c)
Solution
Deactivate the low-voltage protection for the section;
Check for any abnormal sign of the PTs;
Replace the fuses with a new one. If the primary fuse is blown, replace the fuse after cutting off
power supply to the PTs.
Put the relevant interlock and low-voltage protection for the section into service.
4.12
Overcurrent of Certain 380V Section

a)
Phenomenon
The system undergoes a surge, a buzzer sounds and an alarm is activated;
The power supply to all loads of the failure section fail and the low-voltage protection trips the
relevant motors.
If the busbar is short circuited, there may be smoke, fire, explosion or burnt odour in switchgear
rooms,
- 82 -
b)
Possible causes
The failure circuit-breaker of a user of 380V auxiliary power busbar section can not be opened;
A 380V auxiliary power busbar section is short-circuited.
c)
Solution
Check the operation of the protections.
If no failure is found in the circuit, it is allowed to force energizing the busbar once.
Go to the switchgear rooms to check for busbar failures or override trip due to circuit-breaker
failure to operate.
If the reason is circuit breaker failure, proceed with the following steps:
1) Manually open the circuit-breakers and blade switches not tripped and energize the busbar
using service power circuit-breakers;
2) Cut off power supply to the failure circuit-breakers, inform maintenance personnel, and
energize the busbar only after the failure is cleared.
4.13
Immediately de-energize the cables in case of any of the following conditions:

Cables explode, smoke or catch fire
Cables discharge electricity to ground due to insulation breakdown.
Other conditions endangering cable safety exist.
4.14
Cable Catching Fire

Inform firemen, inform all operators to turn off the relevant equipments and immediately use
CO2 or dry powder extinguishers, dry sand or soil to extinguish fire. It is prohibited to use foam
extinguisher before cutting off power supply.
Wear gas-masks when extinguishing fire in cable trench or confined spaces.
When cables catch fire, it is prohibited to touch metallic sheath of cables by hand or move cables
having metallic sheath by hand.
In order to protect against personal injury due to earthed HV cables catching fire, everyone should
be at least 4m away from indoor cables and at least 8m away from the outdoor cable before
de-energizing cable. Wear insulating shoe if necessary to enter the above areas.
- 83 -
Chapter V Electric Motor

1
Equipment Specification
Technical specification of 6kV motors
Power
factor
0.88
0.90
0.92
0.83
0.89
0.83
0.85
0.86
0.86
0.86
0.85
0.86
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.85
0.80
0.85
Equipment Description
Model
Rated Power
Current
Insulation
IDF
FDF
Primary air fan
Coal pulverizer
Motor-driven feed pump
Condensate pump
Circulating water pump
C-0 belt conveyor
C-01 belt conveyor
C-02 belt conveyor
C-03AB belt conveyor
C-04AB belt conveyor
C-05 belt conveyor
C-06 belt conveyor
C-07 belt conveyor
Screw air compressor
Coal crusher
Fire pump
Instrument air
compressor
Service air compressor
Closed circuit cooling
water pump
YKK630-4TH
YKK450-4TH
YKK630-4TH
YHP560-6-TH
2150kW
500kW
1700kW
520kW
3600kW
1000kW
1900kW
355KW
315KW
315KW
250KW
400KW
160KW
220KW
160KW
200KW
560KW
220KW
244A
57A
184A
65A
400A
110A
372A
42A
37.A
37A
30A
47A
18A
26A
18A
24A
72A
26A
Class F
Class F
Class F
Class F
Class F
Class F
Class F
200KW
24
0.85
200KW
24
0.85
315KW
35A
0.87
2
2.1
YKKL1600-14
YKK4004-4
YKK4003-4
YKK4003-4
YKK3554-4 IP55
YKK4005-4
YKK355-4 IP55
YKK3553-4
YKK355-4
Class F
Class F
Class F
Motor Operation and Maintenance

General Provisions on Motors
Each motor should carry a rating plate of the original manufacturer on its frame. Don't use a
motor not having a rating plate without approval of leaders. A new rating plate should be
fabricated according to the data provided by the original manufacturer or test results.
All auxiliary motors should be equipped with appropriate protection. It is not allowed to put a
motor having not protection into operation.
All standby motors should be ready for starting at any time. Insulation measurement and periodic
rotation operation should be performed if a motor is in standby state for a long term.
The enclosure, ventilation stack, and metal structure of motors should be painted and the rotating
parts should be provided with a securely-mounted guard.
For motors with forced oil circulation bearings, the lube oil loss signal and interlock and
protective devices should in good order. The protective device should not be deactivated.
The motors and starters should have their frames suitably earthed
The areas around motors should be clean and dry and protected against water, steam and oil
incursion. Especially, there is not any obstacle around ventilation ports of motors. The ventilation
ports should be free of dust.
The motors should be tested according to the provisions on handover and preventative tests after
motor hand-over, overhaul or replacement of coils.
- 84 -
2.2
Provisions on Motor Operation
2.2.1
Temperature provision
All motors, including HV motors, LV motors, AC and DC motors, should not operate at the rating
higher than the ones specified on rating plates in normal operation.
The highest temperature of motor winding and core should be in accordance with the values
specified by manufacturers, which should not be exceeded under any operating mode.
The highest temperature of motor bearings should be in accordance with the values specified by
manufacturers, which should not be exceeded under any operating mode.
If the values specified by manufacturers are unavailable, the allowable temperature and
temperature rise of motor parts shown in the following table shall apply under the continuous
rated load and intake air temperature not greater than 40.
Insulat
ion
class
Measurement
Item
Maximum
allowable
temperature rise
A
Maximum
allowable
temperature
Maximum
allowable
temperature rise
E
Maximum
allowable
temperature
Maximum
allowable
temperature rise
B
Maximum
allowable
temperature
Maximum
allowable
temperature rise
F
Maximum
allowable
temperature
Maximum
allowable
temperature rise
H
Maximum
allowable
temperature
Test Method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Thermometer
method
Resistance
method
Stator
Winding
Rotor Winding
Wound
Cage
rotor
rotor
Stator
core
Slip
ring
Sliding
bearing
Rolling
bearing
55
55
60
60
40
55
60
60
95
95
100
100
80
90
100
100
65
65
75
70
40
55
75
75
105
105
115
110
80
95
115
115
70
70
70
80
80
40
55
80
80
80
110
110
120
120
80
95
120
120
85
85
100
90
40
55
100
100
120
125
140
130
80
95
100
100
105
105
125
100
40
55
125
125
145
145
165
140
80
95
165
165
For motors having coolers, the inlet air temperature should not be lower than 5 and not be
higher than 40. For motors with ventilating duct, ventilation dampers shall be appropriately
adjusted to limit air inlet flow in winter.
- 85 -
For the motors with air coolers, the inlet water temperature should not be lower than 5 to
prevent condensation in air coolers.
When thermometer methods is used to measure motor temperature, an alcohol thermometer other
than a mercury thermometer is recommended.
For motors without coolers, run the motors at a reduced load current when the ambient
temperature exceeds 40. When the ambient temperature drop to below 35, it is allowed to
raise the load current. For the value of addition, refer to the following table:
Inlet Air Temperature
( )
Change
in
stator
current (%)
2.2.2
Below 25
30
3540
40
45
50
+8
+5
Rated value
-5
-10
-15
Provisions on voltage, current, vibration and shaft play

Motor can run within the range of 95-110 rated voltage while the rated output remain
unchanged. When the voltage rises up, the current should be reduced correspondingly. When the
voltage drops, the current should not exceed 105% the rated value.
When motors run with the rated output, its voltage unbalance value should not exceed 5% the
rated value.
For AC motors, the three-phase unbalanced current should exceed 10% the rated value and the
current of any phase should not exceed the rated value.
The vibration and shaft play of running motors should not exceed the values shown in the
following table:
Rated speed: (rpm)

Vibration
value
(peak-to-peak value), mm
Shaft play, mm
2.2.3
3000
0.05
1500
0.085
24
1000
0.10
Up to 750
0.12
24
Provision on insulation resistance of motors

The insulation resistance of LV motors should be measured using 500V megger. The measured
insulation resistance should not be lower than 0.5M.
The insulation resistance of HV motors should be measured using 1000V or 2500V megger. The
measured insulation resistance should not be lower than 1M/kV.
The insulation resistance of bearing insulating pads for motors should be measured using 1000V
megger. The measured insulation resistance should not be lower than 1M.
The insulation resistance must be measured prior to startup of new motors or overhauled motors.
For motors with heaters, the insulation resistance should be measured prior to starting if being out
of service for one month or damped.
The insulation resistance should be measured prior to starting if motors without heaters or motors
with unused heaters are out of service for half month.
For standby motors, the insulation resistance should be periodically measured in accordance with
the Periodic Switching and Test for Electrical Equipments. If the sign of significant moisture or
the possibility of decrease in insulation resistance is found, measure insulation resistance on a
timely basis and deal with the motors which insulation resistance does not comply with the
requirements.
Fro 6kV motors, the insulation resistance measured should not deviate significantly from the
previous value if measured at the same ambient temperature. The absorption factor (R60R15)
should also be measured and the measured value should be more than 1.3.
- 86 -
After measurement, the measurement values should be recorded on a log for future reference.
Dont start up motors which insulation resistance does not comply with requirements. Under
special circumstance, it is allowed to start such motors after obtaining the approval of the chief
engineers.
Motors having lower insulation resistance need be dried using the following method;
1)
If the motors are equipped with a heater, turn on the heater.
2) Copper loss method: Apply 60~70 % the rated current (DC current) to stator coils and
adjust the temperature by changing current amplitude. However, the temperature on motor coil
surface should not exceed 75.
3)
Pay attention to the following points when drying motors:

a.Dont apply DC current to extremely damp motors to prevent insulation breakdown.
b.During motor drying, place several thermometers at different parts to know temperature
and prevent local overheating.
c.Slowly heat the damp motor parts to avoid damage to insulation.
d.Measure the temperature and insulation at an interval of 30 min. When the temperature
becomes stable, it is allowed to appropriately extend the interval until the insulation
resistance attains a steady value.
3
3.1
Motor Patrol Inspection and Maintenance

Inspection Prior to Motor Startup
Check that no persons work on electrical circuits and mechanical parts, the permits to work have
been withdrawn and temporary safety devices have been removed.
Measure the insulation resistance of motors, cables and bearing. The measurement values are not
lower than the specified values.
The fans, coupling guard and enclosures of motors are suitably earthed, bolts and nuts are
tightened, there is not exposed live part, coolers are free of condensation and foreign matters, and
bearing oil level and color are normal. If water is used to cool bearings, firstly put the cooling
water system into operation.
Turn the motor rotor by hand to ensure that the rotors rotate freely, no friction and jamming exist
between stators and rotors, and the mechanical parts are in good order.
For motors with wound rotors, contact between brush and slide rings is good, the brush is
complete and free of swinging and jamming inside brush frames, uniform pressure is maintained
between brush and frames, the brush frame is about 3mm away from the slide rings, and the blade
switches or contactors used to short-circuit frequency sensitive rheostats are in open position.
The circuit-breakers, fuses and blade switches of the primary circuits are in good order, the
operating mechanisms can be operated freely without jamming, and the fuse rating comply with
the requirements.
The secondary circuits are in good order, the measuring meters, signal, protection and emergency
buttons are in good order and the relaying protection and interlock have been correctly put into
service.
3.2
Inspection during Motor Operation

Check that the motor voltage and current dont exceed the rating and abnormal current rise does
not occur compared with the value under the same load.
Check that the motors and driven machines have normal temperature, cable terminals are not
overheated, the temperature measuring devices are in good order and no abnormal bearing
temperature rise exists.
- 87 -
The motors are free of abnormal noise, burnt odor and smoke. Periodically clean the motors to
ensure that the motors are free of foreign matters, water and steam leakage. Cold air entering
motors should be clean and dry. Check that the cooling systems are normally operating.
Check that the bearings are suitably lubricated, lube oil is normally supplied to bearings, oil level,
color and oil ring rotation are in good order and forced lubrication systems are normally operating.
Replenish the oil with the same designation when necessary.
The motor vibration and shaft play should not exceed the specified values.
The guards, junction boxes and control boxes for motors are in good order;
In case of DC motors or wound rotor type motors, check that slide rings or commutators don't
strike fire, uniform pressure is maintained, brushes and leads are complete, not short and not
short-circuited to enclosures, slide rings are smooth and free of burnt and discoloration, and the
blade switches or contactors used to short-circuit frequency sensitive rheostats are in RUN
position.
Check that the relaying protection, secondary circuits and signal indication are in good order.
If any abnormal situation is found, make timely report and analysis to determine whether the
motors can continue to run or not. In case of emergencies, stop the motors and then report to shift
supervisors.
Abnormal Operation and Accident Handling for Motors

In case of any of the following conditions, immediately stop the motors, start the standby motors
and report to shift supervisors:
Personal injury occurs on motors, power supply circuits or driven machines;
The driven machines are damaged so that it is difficult to sustain operation;
Spark, smoke or fire are found inside the starters or adjusters.
The motors undergo violent vibration, significant shaft play, internal shock, and friction between
stators and rotors.
The temperature of motors and bearings sharply rise and exceed the allowable value.
Abnormal noise or speed drop;
Major accidents for which immediate motor stop is required, such as fire and flood which
endanger the safe operation of motors.
For key motors, it is allowed to firstly start the standby motor and then stop the failure motors in
case of any of the following conditions:
Abnormal noise or burnt insulation odor is found.
Spark or smoke appear inside motors or starters,
The stator current exceeds the rated current and can not be reduced by decreasing the power
output,
The core temperature for motors exceeds the allowable value and it is impossible to correct this
problem.
The bearing temperature exceeds the allowable value and such problem can not be corrected.
The motors are flooded by water.
During startup or operation, frictions between motor stators and rotors is heard
Three-phase current imbalance exceeds 10%;
Serious ring fire occurs on DC motors and it is impossible to extinguish ring fire.
4.1
Motors Tripped during Operation

- 88 -
4.1.1
Possible causes
Motors, electrical components or driven machines failure.
DC systems are grounded at two points (in this case, the system is not subject to surge).
The protection or interlock means is incorrectly operated (in this case, the system is not subject to
surge).
Power failure etc
4.1.2
Solution
If surge current appears prior to tripping, it is prohibited to re-start motors;
If 6kV motors are tripped in case of emergencies, it is prohibited to re-start it;
If standby motors are automatically put into operation, reset the audible alarm and push all
switches to their normal positions;
If standby motors are not automatically put into operation, rapidly close the circuit-breakers of the
standby motors and investigate and report the causes of motor tripping to shift supervisors;
It is allowed to re-start the motors only when the cause of tripping is incorrect manipulation,
protection failure or voltage loss. In case of key motors without standby ones, it is allowed to
restart them if no current surge or significant failure occurs prior to tripping. In case of ordinary
motors, stop them for inspection.
Investigate the cause of tripping and keep the record of the operation of protections.
4.2
Motors are Tripped Immediately after Circuit-breakers are Closed

a)
Phenomenon
After the closing button is pressed, the motor current sharply rise and then drop to zero, and the
red lamp turn on and then turn off.
The audible alarm is active and the green lamp is flashing.
b)
Possible causes
Power failure (such as blown fuses and abnormal voltage)
Circuit-breakers and control circuits failure;
Improper operation;
he protection is triggered due to circuit failures;
c)
Solution
Inspect electrical and mechanical components;
If all is in order, it is allowed to restart motors once.
4.3
The Quick-breaking or Overload Protection is Triggered when Motors Start up after

Installation or Maintenance
a)
Possible causes
Mechanical jamming or over-torque
Short-circuit inside motors or cables;
The preset threshold value of quick-breaking protector is too small or the delay time preset for
overload protection is too short, etc
b)
Solution
Contact instrument personnel

4.4 After motor circuit-breakers are closed, the rotors remain standstill or the speed can not reach
- 89 -
the rated value, abnormal noise is heard, the motor current is zero or remain at the full scale
value of ammeters for more than normal time.
a)
Possible causes
Phase loss of one stator circuit (fuses are single-phase blown, circuit-breakers are not three-phase
closed, loose contact exists in one phase of blade switches or circuit-breakers, stator windings are
single-phase broken).
Broken wire or loose contact exist in one phase of rotor circuits (for example, broken connection
between copper bars or aluminum bars of cage rotor and end rings, open connection at soldered
joints of wound rotor windings, damaged connection between leads and slide rings, abnormal
brushes, opened starter circuits, etc)
Mechanical components of motors are jammed;
Stator winding connection is incorrect (delta connection is changed to Y-connection, one phase is
reversely wired in Y-connected winding, etc)
DC armatures are open-circuited, contact between leads and brushes are loose or the brushes are
in incorrect position.
The magnetic field of DC motors is open-circuited, contact with resistors is loose or a lead is
broken, etc.
b)
Solution
Immediately turn off motors;
Turn machines to confirm whether the machines are overloaded. Turn off motors before the
machines are turned.
Check whether contact between starting resistors and brushes of wound rotor type motors is loose
and armature circuits and field circuits of DC motors are normal or not;
If the machines are in order, check for phase loss, loose switch contact, broken motor wires or
incorrect wiring. It is allowed to restart motors only after the causes of problems are investigated
and eliminated;
Contact maintenance personnel if the causes of problems can not be found through the
above-mentioned check,
4.5 During motor operation, running noise changes, running speed drops and motor current
abnormally rise or drop to zero.
a)
Possible causes
Phase loss in stator circuits;
System voltage drop;
Turn-to-turn short-circuit, etc
b)
Solution
If the motor current does not significantly rise and the machineries run normally, adjust power
voltage to the rated value and appropriately reduce the load as possible. It should be noted that the
rated current be not exceeded;
If the motor current sharply rises or drops to zero and the operating conditions of machineries
change (such as vibration and temperature rise), the motors are running on two phases. In case of
key motors, immediately start up the standby motors. In case of ordinary motors, immediately
stop them.
4.6 The stator current undergoes cyclic swing during motor operation.
a)
Possible causes
- 90 -
The rotors of cage motors is broken, welded joints are loose, the ends is short-circuited or
open-circuited;
For wound rotor type motors, the welded joints of rotor windings are damaged, loose contact or
other failures exist in slide ring short-circuiting device or varistors;
The mechanical load experiences uneven change, etc.
b)
Solution
Start the standby motors and stop the failure ones;
If there is not standby motors and the relevant measures is ineffective, stop the failure ones;
Stop, inspect and repair the motors.
4.7 Motors are overloaded

a)
Phenomenon
The current exceeds the rated value;
The motor enclosures are overheated or have a higher temperature, the coil temperature rise up
and a High Temperature signal may also be issued.
b)
Solution
Attempt to reduce loads so that the current drops to below the rated value;
Start standby motors;
Pay close attention to operating conditions and inspect electrical circuits.
4.8
The motor stator temperature sharply rises and exceed the rated values
Solution:
Check inlet air temperature, ventilation and cooling water system;
Check for blocked ventilation channels and broken fan blades;
Check whether the three-phase current is balanced and the current exceed the normal value;
When motors run at a reduced load, pay close attention to its operating conditions;
If the above-mentioned measures are ineffective, start the standby motors, stop, inspect and repair
the failure motors.
4.9 Abnormal Vibration

a)
Possible causes
The driven machineries are misaligned;
Friction between moving parts and stationary parts;
Damaged bearings or loose foundation bolts;
Phase loss, etc
b)
Solution
If the vibration value is still within the specified range, the motors are allowed to continue
operation. If necessary, start the standby motors, report problems and pay close attention to
motors.
If the vibration is so violent as to exceed the specified range, immediately stop the motors and
then deal with the problems.
4.10 Bearing Overheating

a)
Possible causes
Poor lubrication;
- 91 -
The motor bearings are misaligned or damaged;

The drive belts are excessively tensioned and bearing caps are tightly covered;
The motors are not aligned with driven machineries;
Insufficient oil or deteriorated oil quality, etc
b)
Solution
Check whether the bearings are overheated due to abnormal unit vibration;
If a standby motor is available, start it and stop and repair the failure one. If a standby motor is
unavailable, pay close attention to operating condition, inspect motors and bearing and report the
trouble to leaders.
c) If the temperature continues to rise above the specified value, report such trouble to shift
supervisors and stop the motors.
4.11 Slide rings, brush holders and brush frames are overheated during the operation of wound
rotor type motors
a)
Possible causes
Loose contact between brushes and brush holders;
Unstable brush models;
The brush pressure is too large or uneven
b)
Solution
Check for suitable brush designation;
Adjust the brush pressure so that good contact is maintained between brushes and holders;
If the above-mentioned measures are ineffective, start the standby motors, stop, the failure motor
and contact maintenance personnel.
4.12 Dealing with Motors Catching Fire

It is necessary to firstly cut off power supply.
Then extinguish fire using CO2, dry powder and 1211 fire extinguishers. It is strictly prohibited to
use foam fire extinguishers for electrical fire. Prevent dry powder from entering bearings when
using dry powder fire extinguishers,
- 92 -
Chapter VI DC, Emergency and UPS Power Supply System

1
Equipment Specification for DC Systems
1.1
JZ-BPD- smart battery monitor
1.1.1 General description

JZ-BPD- smart battery monitors are microprocessor-based smart detecting instruments. It
adopts AI smart data logging technique and display cell voltage, overall voltage, battery current
and temperature and other parameters on a large LCD screen. It is able to transit data information
to remote control terminals via RS-232 and RS-422/485 ports.
It is mainly used to detect battery performance in electric power and telecommunication sectors.
Technical Data
Grid frequency: 50Hz10%
1) Range of voltage measurement:0~3V (0~18V) for battery cells, and 0~300V for storage
pack
2) Range of current measurement: 0-1000A (optional sensor)
3) Range of temperature measurement-25~125 C
4) Measurement error: voltage: 0.5% current: 0.5% Temperature: 2 C
5) Measurement cycle:<45S
6) Number of detectable channels:1~144 channels
7) Operating mode: Continuous, automatic
8) Product specification: 36 channels for basic models, and 144 channels available upon
request
9) Max. power consumption: 50VA
10) Display: 320*240 LCD
11) Communication ports: RS232, RS485
1.1.2
Instruction manual for JZ-LPD-IV smart ground monitors

General Description
DC power sources are used for the control and protective circuits of power plants and transformer
substations to ensure safe operation of electric power systems. This power sources are insulated
against ground. Single-point earthing of DC feeders will not cause impact on normal system
operation. However, the earthing point must be isolated and eliminated, Otherwise, serious
accident will occur when another point is grounded.
JZ-IPD-IV smart ground monitors are microprocessor-based smart detecting instruments. It
detects insulation resistance between busbar and ground using DC measuring method, balanced
bridge and unbalanced bridge. Signal input to DC systems is not required and the measured
values are not affected by earth capacity of DC feeders. The ground impedance at positive and
negative ends of each branch is accurately calculated from current difference. When the ground
resistance is lower than the preset values, an alarm will be generated.
Two types of detecting modes, namely balanced bridge and unbalanced bridge, are provided for
JZ-IPD-IV smart ground monitors. The ground resistance of positive busbar, negative busbar and
branches as well as the resistance when positive busbar, negative busbar and branches are earthed
at a time can be calculated by starting balanced and unbalanced bridges.
JZ-IPD-IV smart ground monitors are able to measure voltage. When busbar voltage exceeds the
preset value, a busbar undervoltage or busbar over-voltage alarm will be generated. In addition,
- 93 -
JZ-IPD-IV is able to store 180 alarm events and to transit data information to remote control
terminals via RS232, or RS422/485 ports.
Technical Data
1)
Voltage classDC220V
2)
Range of ground resistance alarm0~99K
3)
Ground resistance resolution1K
4)
Busbar voltage error: below 1%
5)
Busbar ground resistance error: below 15%
6)
Branch ground resistance error: below 20%
7)
Number of detectable channels: 0~128 channels (including 2 sections)
8)
Operating mode: Continuous, automatic
9)
Max. power consumption: 50VA
10) Display: 320*240 LCD

11) Communication ports: RS232, RS485
12) Number of busbar sections detected2
1.1.3 JZ-MC- monitor unit (V4.01)
I
General description
JZ-MC-IV multi-purpose monitor units are microprocessor-based industrial controllers. It adopts

AI and fuzzy control techniques. It monitors and displays operating states and parameters of
power supply systems on LCDs.
It can receive data, operating parameters and command entered by operators, control the power
source systems according to the preset state, transit data information to remote control terminals
via RS-232 or RS-485 ports to achieve four remote functions.
Automatic charging management, busbar &branch ground failure check and battery voltage
measurement etc are incorporate into JZ-MC-IV multi-purpose monitor units.
It is also able to display circuit-breaker status, overvoltage and undervoltage failures. It has output
alarm potential-free contacts and is able to automatically restart after recovery from power failure.
The unit is mainly used for Series GZDW, PEDW DC power source manufactured by Jiuzhou
Electric, is able to monitor and control various rectifier module and batteries manufactured by
Jiuzhou Electric. In addition, it is also able to control power source products manufactured by
other producers after modifying control programs depending on users demand.
II
Technical Data
Power voltage: 220V10% (AC or DC)

Control output voltage Uo-6.5V+6.5V, 0V5V
DC input: 0V5V, 025mA, 050mA, 0100mA, 8 channels (including 2 standby channels)
Ground input:
1)
Range of ground resistance alarm 0~99K
2)
Ground resistance resolution 1K
3)
Busbar voltage error below 1.5%

- 94 -
4)
Busbar ground resistance error below 15%
5)
Branch ground resistance error: below 20%
6)
Number of detectable channels: 0~96 channels (including 2 sections)
7)
8)
Number of busbar sections detected 2
Input from battery

1)
Range of voltage measurement:0~18V for battery cells, and 0~300V for battery pack
2)
Range of current measurement:
3)
Range of temperature measurement
4)
Error: voltage: 0.5%
5)
Measurement cycle <45S
6)
Number of detectable channels:108 channels
7)
8)
Max. power consumption: 50VA
0-1000A (optional sensor)

-25~125 C
current: 0.5% Temperature: 2 C
AC input: three-phase, four-wire: phase voltage: about 220V, phase current: <5A
Degree of protection: IP20
Display: 320240 dot matrix LCD
Operation means: keyboard
Communication interface RS-232, RS-485
1.2 Technical Data of Storage Batteries:
Battery type
Cell voltage
Floating charge voltage
Equalizing charge voltage
Service life
VRLA battery
2V
2.232.27 V/
2.232.27 V/cell
2.32.4 V/
2.32.4 V/cell
15 25
15 years (25)
Battery Operation and Maintenance
2.1 Operating Mode of DC Systems

The voltage classes of the DC systems are 110V and 220V, among which DC220V systems are
used for drive equipments and DC110V systems are used for control.
DC system wiring:
1) The DC power supply systems of #1 and #2 units adopt sectionalized single-busbar wiring
and the one of #3 unit adopts single-busbar wiring. The voltage class is 220V.
2) Sectionalized single-busbar wiring method is used for the DC systems for control of #1, 2 and
3 units. The voltage class is 110V.
3) Sectionalized single-busbar wiring method is used for the DC systems for network control.
The voltage class is 110V.
4) Sectionalized single-busbar wiring method is used for the DC systems for coal handling
system control. The voltage class is 110V.
- 95 -
One set of 220VDC system is provided for #1 and #2 units respectively. A bus-tie circuit-breaker
is provided between the DC busbar for drive systems of #1 and #2 units so that the two sets of DC
systems back up each other. In normal operation, the two sets of DC busbar separately operate.
Each set of DC system for drive systems is composed of one set of 1800Ah VRLA batteries
(including 104 cells) and one set of HF switching rectifiers (n+1 redundant hot standby, 20A,
220V). One set of 220VDC system is provided for #3 unit and composed of one set of 1800Ah
VRLA batteries (including 104 cells) and one set of HF switching rectifiers (n+1 redundant hot
standby, 20A, 220V). One set of identical 110VDC system for control is provided for each unit
and composed of two sets of 500Ah VRLA batteries (including 51 cells) and one set of HF
switching rectifiers (n+1 redundant hot standby, 20A, 110V). One bus-tie circuit-breaker is
provided between two sets of DC busbar. In normal operation, the two sets of DC busbar operate
separately. One set of identical 110VDC system is provided for network control and composed of
one set of 400Ah VRLA batteries (including 51 cells) and one set of HF switching rectifiers (n+1
redundant hot standby, 20A, 110V); One set of identical 110VDC system is provided for the coal
handling system and composed of one set of 100Ah VRLA batteries (including 52 cells) and one
set of HF switching rectifiers (n+1 redundant hot standby, 20A, 110V).
The HF switching rectifier power supply of each set of busbar operates on busbar in parallel with
battery pack power supply. The rectifier charges the storage batteries in floating mode by a small
current in addition to normal load.
2.2 Operating Parameters of DC Systems
The DC system busbar voltage should often be the nominal 5V
The cell voltage should often be 2.25V. Balancing charge should be performed when it is below
2.18V.
The floating charge voltage for battery cells is 2.25V to 2.35V
Insulation resistance:
1) The insulation resistance of batteries should be 0.2M or higher (voltmeter method)
2) The insulation resistance of DC busbar should be 50M or higher (measured with 500V
megger)
3) The insulation resistance of DC branches should be 0.5M or higher (500V megger used)
The panels or cabinets should have good insulation performance and a resistance of insulation
against ground no smaller than 5M. The insulation resistance between different live parts should
not be less than 10M
2.3
Patrol Inspection for DC Systems
2.3.1 Storage battery

The floating charge current of battery packs is appropriate and battery pack is not overcharged or
undercharged.
There is not overpowering odor inside the battery rooms and the ventilation and auxiliary
equipments are in good order.
The battery rooms are clean, free of foreign materials and have a normal temperature (about
25)
Normal lighting facilities and emergency lighting facilities are provided and lamps should be
arranged above passages.
The batteries are free of breakage or leakage.
The batteries are not overheated
Battery plates are free of bending, expansion, crack or short-circuiting.
- 96 -
Each connectors and connecting wires are free of looseness, short-circuiting or earthing, etc.
It is strictly prohibited to use open fire or perform operations which may produce spark, inside the
battery rooms. Special fire-extinguishers, such as dry powder ones and carbon tetrachloride ones,
should be located at the rooms.
The battery should be kept 0.5m away from heat sources and spark generators. Start up exhaust
fans and cut off power supply before replacing bulbs.
HF switching rectifiers
The RUN lamps remain on and the indication is normal.
The output voltage and current are normal;
All components are free of overheating, the connections are not loose and there is not abnormal
sound
All fuses are in order and not blown.
The fans of HF switching rectifiers are normally funning.
2.3.2 DC panel
Check that the busbar voltage, floating charge current and load current are normal.
Check that the insulation of DC systems is normal.
Check that the flash apparatus tested operate normally.
Check that all switches and blade switches on DC panels are in correct position.
Check that all lamps mounted on the panels give correct indication and there is not abnormal
signal.
Check that no terminal strips and cable terminals inside the panel is overheated
2.4
C. How to Operate DC System:
2.4.1 Precaution for operating the DC system

If parallel connection is required for the DC systems, it is necessary to check for correct polarity
and normal voltage difference (not exceed 2 to 3V generally).
If two circuits of power sources supply power to feeders, one circuit is operating and another
circuit is as standby in normal operation. Loop closing, loop opening and load changeover
operation can be performed only when the bus-tie circuit-breakers are closed.
When two sets of DC busbar have different ground polarity, parallel operation is strictly
forbidden.
Batteries must operate in parallel with HF switching rectifier sets. The rectifier sets supply normal
load current and battery floating charge current. The storage batteries are used as power source in
case of shock load and emergencies.
In normal operation, the DC busbar is not allowed to operate independently from the battery pack.
In case HF switching rectifier set in operation failures, the batteries can separately supply power
to the load for a short time. If the failure rectifier sets can not resume normal operation, within a
short time, the standby rectifier sets will be put into operation. If it is impossible to put the
standby rectifier set into operation, the two sets of DC busbar should be parallel connected so that
the rectifier sets of another busbar operate with the two sets of DC busbar.
When one set of HF rectifier set is operating with two sets of busbar, pay close attention to the
load, floating charge current and operating conditions of HF switching rectifiers.
Carry out detailed check before a new DC system or overhauled DC systems are put into
operation. The relevant inspection records should be available.
- 97 -
If DC power failure of certain line protection occurs, disable the protection after obtaining the
approval from dispatchers. After normal power supply is resumed, enable the protection after
obtaining the approval from dispatchers.
Operators should report and record inspection, operation, abnormal conditions and accident
handling in detail.
2.4.2 How to put a HF switching rectifier set into floating charge operation
Check that the HF switching rectifier is in order and has received AC power source;
Start the HF switching rectifier and put it into floating charge mode;
Check that the HF switching-mode rectifier is in normal operation
Close the output circuit-breaker for HF switching rectifier
Push the DPDT switches of DC busbar to the busbar charging storage batteries;
Check that the HF switching-mode rectifier is in normal operation
Abnormal Operation and Accident Handling for DC Systems
3.1 Abnormal DC Busbar Voltage

a)
Phenomenon
An audible alarm is active and the DC Busbar Failure alarm window is highlighted;
The HF Switching-mode Rectifier Failure alarm window is highlighted;
Low busbar voltage is indicated on microprocessor-based monitor modules.
b)
Solution
Check the output HF switching rectifiers and insulation monitors, and use multimeters to
determined whether the busbar voltage is lower than the normal value or not.
If the failures of HF switching rectifiers cause abnormal busbar voltage, deal with the problem
following 6.3.4;
If the reason is AC power failure, recover AC power supply as soon as possible;
If the measure busbar voltage is normal and low busbar voltage is indicated on the monitor units,
contact maintenance personnel.
3.2 HF Switching Rectifier Failure

a)
Phenomenon
A HF switching rectifier failure alarm is active;

DC Busbar Voltage Failure signal may also be issued;
The local Abnormal lamp on the panel of HF switching rectifiers turns on.
The output voltage and current of HF switching rectifiers are abnormal;
b)
Solution

Check the storage batteries can normally supply power to its load and other rectifiers operating in
parallel with the failure rectifier malfunction. If other rectifiers also malfunction, the reasons may be
input over-voltage/under-voltage or output over-voltage.
If the reason is the failure of some HF switching rectifiers, put standby HF switching rectifiers into
operation, allow the failure one to be out of service and contact maintenance personnel. If many
rectifiers failure so that standby rectifiers can not sustain normal operation, allow two sets of DC
busbar to operate in parallel with each other, isolate the failure rectifiers and contact maintenance
- 98 -
personnel.
After failures have been cleared, put the HF switching rectifier into operation and return to the
normal operating modes.
3.3 DC Systems are Grounded
a)
Phenomenon
An audible alarm is active and the DC Busbar Failure alarm window is highlighted;
An alarm signal and insulation resistance of failure branches is indicated on the microprocessor
insulation monitors.
Measure the voltage of positive and negative DC busbar to ground.
b)
Solution

Operators should, according to information indicated on the insulation monitors, record and report
the No. of grounded branch or branch with reduced insulation as well as branch power source to
shift supervisors, and contact maintenance personnel.
If the reason for grounding is that maintenance personnel works on DC circuits, immediately stop
works to eliminate grounding.
If grounding results from emergency lighting circuits, firstly cut off power supply, report the causes
to shift supervisors and contact maintenance personnel;
Check whether any equipment is started or shut down. If YES, carefully check such equipments.
Firstly check defective equipments or equipments operating in worse environments.
Power supply is cut off for troubleshooting after obtaining the approval from shift supervisors and
concerned persons.
Troubleshooting for DC system ground failures should be performed by maintenance personnel
under the uniform leadership of shift supervisors. Operators should coordinate with maintenance
personnel in this regard. If troubleshooting concerns equipments managed by dispatchers, firstly
obtain the agreement from dispatchers.
3.4 Treatment for other Failures
If a fuse at battery pack output is blown, firstly check rectifier panels, then check interconnecting
cable between battery pack and at output terminals. If no problem is found, replace the fuse once. If
the new fuse is blown again, don't continue to replace the fuse, but report such situation to shift
supervisors and inform maintenance personnel. Wear protective gloves when replacing fuses.
No indication on voltmeters: If operators find that no indication is given on the voltmeters of
rectifiers, battery or DC busbar, firstly check for busbar voltage loss using an electroscope. If the
reason is not busbar voltage loss, check circuit voltage and voltmeter fuses. It is impossible to clear
failures, report to shift supervisors and contact maintenance personnel.
If no current is output from the rectifier panel, firstly check battery packs and then DC busbar. Turn
off HF switching rectifier modules and carefully investigate the causes of failures. If it is impossible
to clear failures, report such failures to shift supervisors and contact maintenance personnel. If it is
expected it will take a long time to clear failures, close the bus-tie circuit-breakers so that the
standby power source take over the load.
If the fuses at battery output are blown and DC busbar voltage loss results from rectifier panel
tripping, immediately report such problem to shift supervisors and put standby HF switching
rectifiers into operation. In case the standby one can not be put into operation, close the bus-tie
circuit-breakers so that another (sectionalized) busbar takes over the load
When a feeder circuit-breaker is tripped, dont supply power until the causes have been investigated
- 99 -
and appropriate measures have been taken.
4.1 Technical Data of Diesel-engine Generator

Detailed Technical Data of WILSON P900E1 Diesel-engine Generator
Power Generating Set Data

Model of Power P900E1
Generating Set
Diesel Engine Data

Model of Diesel Engine
4006TAG3A
Apparent
power
output reserve
Active
power
output reserve
900KVA
Max. power output
786KW
720KW
6 cylinders, inline
Continuous
apparent
power
output
Continuous active
power output
Speed
800KVA
Number of cylinders
and
cylinder
arrangement
Cylinder bore
160mm
Voltage, phase
640KW
Stroke
190mm
Current
380V
phases,
wires
1368A
1500 rpm
22.9L
Power factor
0.8 (lag)
Oil consumption at
power reserve and
full load (640kW)
Oil consumption at
continuous power
and
full
load
(584kW)
Overall length
Width
190 L/hr
Capacity
(displacement)
Exhaust air flow
1182 m3/min
Degree
protection
IP23
170 L/hr
Fuel gas consumption
73 m3/min
Insulation
class
Class H
4283mm
1912mm
193 m3/min
500OC
Frequency
Brand
50Hz
Leroy Somer
Height
2286mm
Smoke exhaust flow

Exhaust
fumes
temperature
Air intake method:
Place of origin
and
manufacturers
FG Wilson of
UK
Net weight
6259kg
Cooling method
Noise
97dB
or
lower
FG Wilson
of UK
Starting mode:
turbo
supercharging,
air-to-air cooling
With fans and
water tanks, closed
circulating water
cooling
Through
24V
battery
123
Place of origin and

manufacturers
Total
machine
oil
capacity
Total cooling water
capacity
Speed governing
Oil spray mode
Oil tank
Place of origin and
manufacturers
Generator Data
Model
of
power
generator
Excitation
method
Voltage
regulation
of
LL7024P
Brushless
self-excitation
AVR
3
4
105
Electronic governor
Mechanical
spraying
1671L
Perkins-Rolls-Royc
e of UK
4.2 Patrol Inspection for Diesel-engine Generators

The diesel-engine generator rooms are clean and free of ponding water and the lighting and
ventilation facilities are in order;
The generator body is clean and free of foreign matters;
The electrical control panels are clean and all status indication and alarm window indication are
normal;
The battery voltage is normal and the electrolyte level and specific gravity are normal;
- 100 -
All protections are put into service and are in reset states;
The water heaters, oil heaters, water circulating pumps and oil circulating pumps are in normal
operation and all parameters are normal;
The pressure in air receivers, oil level in fuel oil tanks and water level in cooling water tanks are
normal;
The batteries are normally charged and the charging current is within the specified range;
The diesel engines are free of oil leakage.
The diesel-engine generator end caps are clean, the ventilation facilities and cable connections are in
order;
Carefully check the diesel generating set to confirm that they are ready for startup at any time.
4.3 Main Steps for Routine Diesel generating set test
Check that the diesel generating set is in standby state.
Check that the emergency ON lamp of diesel generating sets turn on;
Check that the spare power circuit-breakers of the protective sections are in AUTO position;
Push the generator control mode selective switch to the TEST position;
Check that the diesel-engine generator successfully starts up and the speed, voltage and frequency
are normal;
Check that the generator output circuit-breakers and standby power switch of the protective section
are properly closed.
Check that the three-phase current of the diesel-engine generating sets is zero
Check that the three-phase voltage at the diesel-engine generating set output is balanced;
Check that all generator parts are in normal operation and no abnormal signal is sent;
Press the emergency stop pushbuttons of the diesel generating sets:
Check that the generator output circuit-breakers and standby power switch of the protective section
are properly opened;
Check that the diesel-engine generator stops operations
Push the generator control mode selective switch to the AUTO position;
Check that the diesel generating sets are in standby state and the output circuit-breakers store energy
properly;
4.4
Start and Stop Mode of Diesel Generating Sets
4.4.1 Automatic start

Push the control mode selective switch to AUTO, press the emergency ON pushbutton and check
that the emergency ON lamp turns on, the operating power supply to 380V protective section is
missed and the diesel generating set automatically starts up.
4.4.2 Automatic stop
After the generating set has run, push the stop mode selective switch to AUTO. When 380V power
supply is resumed, the diesel generating set output circuit-breakers are tripped, the operating
power circuit-breakers are closed and therefore automatic changeover is accomplished. Then, the
diesel generating set automatically stops and is in standby state.
4.4.3 Manual start
Push the control mode selective switch to MANUAL and start the diesel engine using the START
pushbutton and handle on the diesel engine. After startup, the diesel generating set will
automatically operate at rated parameters.
- 101 -
4.4.4 Manual stop

When the STOP pushbutton is pressed, the diesel generating sets will automatically stop.
4.4.5 Test start
Open the generator output blade switch, push the control mode switch to the TEST position and
simulate protective section power failure to check whether the diesel generating set can
automatically start. After the operating power is restored, the generating set should automatically
stop. After the completion of the test, reset the control mode switch to AUTO, close the generator
output blade switch so that the diesel generating set is in standby state again.
4.4.6 Test stop
If the diesel generating set is still in operation after the completion of the test, press the STOP
pushbutton to stop the diesel generating sets.
4.5 Main Steps for Returning Diesel Generating Set to Standby State
All diesel generating set works have been completed and the generating sets are ready for operation.
Check that all diesel-engine generator components are in good order and the auxiliary and control
power has been supplied to the diesel generating sets;
Put the water heaters, oil heaters, water circulating pumps and oil circulating pumps in operation.
All parameters reach the specified values;
Start the air compressors and raise the pressure in air receivers up to the specified value;
Put the battery chargers into operation and check that the charging voltage and current are normal;
Put the diesel-engine generator excitation into service;
Check that all fuses are mounted inside the electrical control panels of the diesel generating sets;
Return the circuit-breaker at the diesel-engine generator output to standby state.
Return the spare power branch switches of the diesel generating sets to the standby state;
Put the low-voltage protective switches into service;
Pull out the mechanical generator starting latch;
Push the local, manual starting handle of the diesel-engine generator to the intermediate position
Mount the fuse for the diesel-engine generator output circuit-breakers and check that the
circuit-breakers store energy properly;
Put the emergency devices of diesel-engine generator into service and check that the emergency ON
lamps turns on;
Push the generator control mode selective switch to AUTO;
Check that the status indication on electrical control panels and alarm window are normal;
4.6 Main steps for parallel operation with the protective section after the diesel-engine generator
has been manually started
Check that the diesel generating sets are in standby state.
Push the generator control mode selective switch to MANUAL;
Manually start up the diesel generating sets and check that the speed, voltage and frequency are
normal;
Press the pushbuttons to close the generator circuit-breakers and check that the red closing lamp of
the circuit-breakers at the diesel generating set output turn on;
Confirm that the standby circuit-breakers are in open position, and close the standby circuit-breakers
sequentially.
- 102 -
Open the operating power circuit-breakers;

Check that the standby power circuit-breakers have been closed and the red lamps turn on;
Check that the diesel generating sets and protective sections are in normal operation.
AC UPS System
One set of the UPS manufactured by Qingdao LDC Technology Inc. is provided for each unit. It is
able to supply stable power to local microprocessors, I&C protections, DEH and other key
consumers.
5.1 Main Technical Data of the UPS

aTechnical parameters of rectifiers:
Input
Voltage
Range
of
input voltage
Input
frequency
Input power
factor
Normal
input current
(A)
Max. input
current (A)
380 / 400 / 415V

-20%~+30%
50 / 60 Hz 7%
0.9
18
17
16
23
21
20
27
26
25
34
32
31
36
34
33
45
43
41
54
51
49
68
64
61
Soft
activation
Efficiency
Voltage
regulation
rate
Limit
current (A)
72
68
66
90
85
83
90
86
82
113
107
103
108
103
99
136
129
124
144
137
132
180
171
165
180
171
165
225
214
206
216
205
198
270
256
248
288
274
264
360
343
330
216
206
198
270
257
248
324
308
297
432
411
396
15% 100% : 15 sec

99%
2V
27
26
24
41
39
38
54
51
50
81
77
74
108
102
99
Ripple
voltage
0.5%
b Inverter
DC input range
Waveform
Output voltage
Output power factor
100% on-load voltage
regulation
Range of frequency lock
frequency
Output frequency
(for normal starting )
Harmonic
voltage
distortion (linear load)
110%
110
125%
Overload
state
125
150%
150%
135
129
123
165270VDC/83135VDC
Sine wave
220 / 230 / 240 V 1 PHASE
0.8
1 %
45 55 Hz / 55 65 Hz
50 / 60 Hz 0.01%
<2%
Continuous
10 min
1 min
10 sec
- 103 -
162
155
149

100% load efficiency
Max. output limit current
(A)
92%
92%
93%
93%
93%
93%
93%
94%
94%
94%
94%
132
193
260
390
520
650
780
1044
1308
1560
2088
c Static bypass
Voltage range
Frequency range
Efficiency
KVA
15% (LINE TO NEUTRAL)

45 55 Hz / 55 65 Hz
99.5%
10 15 20 30 40 50
Change-over time:
Mains supply-> Inverter
Inverter-> mains supply
60
80
10
0
12
0
160
0.4 ms
0.4 ms
Electronic protective devices are used and power is
uninterruptedly supplied.
Isolated
Manual bypass
Isolated output
d UPS characteristics
Overall efficiency
Working environment:
Temperature
Humidity (20)
Height
Max. heat dissipation (kW)
Weight (kg)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Width (mm)
Noise
Standards:
-CE
-EN50091-1-2
-FCC CLASS A
Protective circuits:
Short-circuit protection
Lightning protection
EMC filter
Output isolation
LCD display
Indication & alarm:
LED. LCD and buzzer
Potential-free contacts
Battery activation
89%
0.65
350
89%
90%
90%
90%
91%
91%
91%
91.5%
92%
92.5%
0.95
460
-10 40 ( 32 - 104 )
0% - 90% (non condensing)
1500m above sea level
1.3
1.9
2.6
3.0
3.5
4.6
5.5
6.5
500
730
900 1060 1200 1500
2000
2500
1800
800
600
1200
1800
< 65 dBA (at one meter from the front surface of the box)
9.0
3000
Compliant
Compliant
Compliant
Rectifier, standby power source unit and bypass switch
MOV
I/O
I/O &bypass totally isolated
YES
YES
YES
YES
5.2 Main Characteristics of the UPS

1)
Reliable input protection:
Air switches are mounted in all input circuits. When inverter or load failures cause circuit-breakers
to be tripped, power can be continuously transmitted via other circuits.
2)
Input surge protection
A MOV surge protector is mounted at input end. Therefore, the UPS and its loads are protected
against lightning and surge current generated by nearby loads.
3)
Effectively suppressing EMI:
In order to conform to international standards concerning EMC, EMI filters are mounted on the UPS
- 104 -
to significantly reduce EMI and prevent other equipments connected to the same AC input source
from any adverse effect.
4)
High-efficiency AC/DC design:
The phase control technology is applied to regulate DC busbar voltage and ensure that the power
supply is clean. In addition, more durable SCR assemblies and input inductors are used to avoid AC
power supply waveform distortion
5)
F DC/AC design:
Inverters adopt high-efficiency IGBT modules and PWM techniques so as to convert DC voltage to
AC voltage. Therefore, the number of modules used is decreased, the reliability is effectively
improved, and the size and weight of the entire UPS are greatly reduced. The UPS quality is
considerably improved and the operating noise is also greatly reduced.
6)
Isolated I/O design:
Isolating transformers are mounted at the I/O of UPS. This does not solve the problems caused by
poor input AC voltage but also effectively eliminate the effect of ground current and facilitate the
connection of UPS with other equipments. In addition, the two sets of isolating transformers can
ensure that the UPS and its load can continuously and efficiently operate in dangerous electrical
environment, such as lightning.
7)
Plug and Play design
The circuits are composed of several modules inserted in the UPS. These modules can be easily
removed, repaired or replaced. Therefore, they may be called plug and play modules.
8)
Cold starting function:
The UPS unit can be started without mains supply. That is to say, if the UPS has storage batteries
(options), the UPS unit can be started through the batteries (if the UPS is used together with the DC
power source provided by the power plant, the DC power source start UPS). The use of
current-limiting circuit may avoid problems of other many brands (when the batteries are directly
connected with DC busbar having no current, transient surge current may cause damage to
air-breakers and DC capacitors at battery ends)
9)
User-friendly design;
The design of the UPS take account of the methods used to protect it against incorrect operation. For
this reason, a air-breaker sensor and power supply sensor are mounted in circuits. Therefore, any
improper operation will not cause damage to the UPS.
10) Wide input voltage range (380VAC / -20%~+20%)
The design of the UPS takes full account of bad power supply quality in certain areas in China. In
order to further improve the safety and reliability, the range of input voltage is further widened.
Meanwhile, all input components are carefully selected to suit to shock by extreme high voltage and
large current.
11) Outstanding adaptability to worse environments:
All UPS components are high-efficiency and high-safety ones, therefore, the UPS is able to
normally operate in worse environments, such as worse temperature and humidity, some height
above sea level or earthquake.
12) Parallel-connected power source design:
Static switching power supply adopts parallel connection method. Power supply to the loads will not
be affected no matter which condition occur in the UPS.
13) Easy panel operation
The UP/DOWN/EXECUTION switches are mounted on the front panel and the LCD can be easily
- 105 -
operated using display controls. Some key inverter switches are located behind the front door panel
and can be operated after opening the front door (the front door is opened using a key. If a key is
unavailable, it is possible to operate inverter switches by entering a keyword and then accessing
windows) t prevent unauthorized access to UPS controls.
14) Recording capacity:
In order to provide the information for users for reference, information and time of each event are
stored in the UPS. Therefore, users can know any conditions of UPS. Information stored in the UPS
will not be cleared even throughout power failure.
15) Long Mean Time between Failures (MTBF)
Before mounted into the UPS, each components are strictly tested. Each component operate at
reduced rating value to ensure high reliability and high efficiency. The MTBF calculated in
accordance with MIL-HDBK-217E, RELIABILITY PREDICTION OF ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT, is 250,000 hours.
16) Emergency stop device:
In case of emergencies, such as short-circuit fire or earthquake, inverters can be stopped by means of
emergency stop switches or smoke detectors (upon customers request) so that there is not AC power
at transmission end and the loss can be minimized.
17) System architecture
- 106 -
BYPASS INPUT
220/230V,50Hz
1P2W
MAINS INPUT
380/400/415V,
50Hz
3P3W
BATTERY INPUT
220V/110V
3Q1
3Q2
3T1
3L3
3A2
3T2
3KM3
3Q5
OUTPUT
220V/230V
18) The UPS systems are composed of the following parts:

Mains power input circuit-breaker without fuses 3Q1 (Input Breaker )
Bypass power input circuit-breaker without fuses 3Q3 and 3Q4 (Input Breaker )
Battery input circuit-breaker without fuses 3Q2 (Battery Input)
- 107 -
3Q4
3Q3
3L1(3L2) 3A1
3KM2
50Hz
1P2W
UPS Architecture (core components shown only)
Output circuit-breaker without fuses 3Q5 (Output Breaker)
Input Filter & Protection Network;
Rectifier 3A1 (rectifier);
Inverter 3A2 (inverter)
Static switch 3KM2 and 3KM3 (Static Switch)
Isolation transformers 3T1 and 3T2 (Isolation Transformer)
Output filers, etc
When a normal mains input is available, AC voltage is converted into DC voltage into the inverters
and loads (if the optional chargers are able to charge battery packs under normal operating mode). In
case of mains power failure, the DC power source unit provided by users or optional battery packs
supply power to the consumers.
19The front panel is located at the upper part of circuit board boxes and operators can view all
status indication. Switches and keys are provided to operate and set the UPS. The functions of
panel-mounted controls are described below:
LCD display: The LCD display current status and historical information. The UPS parameters,
current time, inverters and buzzers may be set by means of the LCD. The LCD is provided with
back-lit LEDs. The LEDs will turn off after the UP/DOWN/ACK keys are not pressed for 3 min.,
and turn on when any of the UP/DOWN/ACK keys is pressed.
Status LEDs: 24 LEDs indicate the current status of the UPS and provide users with latest
information. When an abnormal condition exists, certain LEDs will turn on. The 24 LEDs are as
follows:
INVERTER ONInverter in operation
INVERTER SSThe static switch for standby power source is opened, static inverter switch is
activated and the inverters supply power to the loads.
SHORT CIRCUITThe UPS output is short-circuited.
FUSEOVER TEMP SDThe inverters are locked due to a blown fuse or high temperature.
- 108 -
INVERTER FAIL SHUTDOWNThe inverters are shut down due to a abnormal output voltage.
BYPASS ON SHUTDOWNWhile the inverters are in execution, the bypass switch without fuses
is activated and causes the inverters to be shut down.
HIGH DC SHUTDOWNWhile the inverters are in execution, a excessively-high DC voltage
causes the inverters to be shut down.
OVERLOAD SHUTDOWNWhen the output load exceeds the rated value, the inverters are shut
down. The UPS will be activated again 7 seconds after the load is reduced.
70%LOADThe UPS is connected with a load exceeding 70% nominal value.
RESERVE AC FAILThe standby AC power voltage is out of range.
RESERVE FREQ FAILThe frequency of the standby AC power source is out of range.
BATTERY LOWThe DC power voltage (or battery voltage) is below 180VDC so that the
inverters will be shut down
BATTERY LOW SHUTDOWNThe DC power voltage (or battery voltage) is below 165VDC
(lower than the DC voltage acceptable to the inverters) so that the inverters are shut down.
RECT AC FAILThe voltage of mains input to the rectifiers is out of range.
ROTATION ERRORThe phase rotation of mains input to the rectifiers is incorrect.
RECTIFIER SHUTDOWNThe DC power voltage is so high (exceeding 295VDC) that the
rectifiers are shut down. The rectifiers will be automatically activated again 30 seconds after a
failure is cleared.
HIGH DC When the DC voltage exceeds 285VDC, the voltage-limiters of the UPS will be
activated so that the voltage does not continue to rise up.
BOOST CHARGEThe batteries are charged in equalizing charge mode.
BATTERY TESTBattery test is in progress.
EMERGENT STOPThe emergency stop is activated so that the inverters are shut down.
DATA LINEThe LED is flashing, indicating that information is transmitted via communication
ports.
alarm LEDs: In case of abnormal conditions, an alarm LED will turn on and users can know the
error information indicated by the LED. When the UPS restore normal conditions, the LED will turn
off. The meaning of each LED is described below:
RECT AC FAILThe AC input to rectifiers is abnormal (such as out-of-range AC input voltage or
phase rotation error) so that rectifiers are shut down.
RESERVE FAILThe standby AC input is abnormal, such as out-of-range AC input voltage or
frequency.
FUSETEMPThe inverter fuses are blown or the inverter temperature is too high.
OVERLOADThe output load exceeds 110%, 125% or 150% the nominal value.
HIGH DCWhen the DC voltage exceeds 285VDC, the LED will turn on.
BAT LOWWhen the DC voltage is below 180VDC, the LED will turn on.
- 109 -
BAT LOW STOPWhen the DC voltage is below 165VDC, the inverters can not be activated and
the LED will turn on.
FAULTThe inverters is shut down due to an abnormal condition, such as overload, short-circuit,
high DC voltage, blown fuse/high temperature, opening of bypass switches or sudden stop,
These LEDs are located behind transparent glass and operators can view them without the need for
opening door panels.
Buzzers sound:
Bypass LED: When the service bypass switch is activated, the LED will turn on. When the
service bypass switch is activated, it is impossible to activate the inverters. If the inverters are in
operation, it will be immediately shut down.
Standby power LED: When the standby power switch is activated, the standby power source unit
will take over power supply to the load and the LED will turn on.
Rectifier LED: When the rectifiers are in normal operation, the LED remains On, indicating that
the input power voltage and phase rotation are correct, the rectifier switch is activated and the DC
busbar voltage is normal.
Power Failure LED: When the UPS is in power failure state, the LED will turn on. The LED
may be used to indicate the result of battery tests. If battery tests fail, the LED will flashing until
operators replace batteries, even when normal power supply is available.
Inverter LED: when the inverter switch is activated, the LED will turn on. The LED indicates
whether the inverters are in operation or not.
Static inverter switch LED: When the static inverter switch becomes activated and static standby
power switch becomes off, the LED will turn on and the inverters supply power to the loads. The
LED generally turns on about 7s after the static inverter switch is activated.
Static standby power switch LED: When the static standby power switch becomes activated and
static inverter switch becomes off, the LED will turn on and the standby power sources supply
power to the loads. Because the static standby power switch and static inverter switch can not be on
at a time, the static inverter switch LED and static standby power switch LED will also turn on at a
time.
Output LED: When there is AC voltage at output terminals, the LED will turn on. This is an
important indication which helps users to determine the availability of AC output
UPWARD key: if is a LCD control key. When UPS information or commands need be reset, it
moves the cursor upwards to the desired items or change numerical values/attributes.
DOWNWARD key: if is a LCD control key. When UPS information or commands need be reset,
it moves the cursor downwards to the desired items or change numerical values/attributes.
ACK key: it is a LCD control key which can be used as a Page Down key and used to confirm
chosen number/ attribute/ items.
Inverter activation switch: It is a switch used to activate inverters. When the key is pressed
together with the inverter control switch (Q), the inverters are activated.
Inverter control switch: It is a inverter control switch. When the key is pressed together with the
inverter activation switch (R), the inverters are activated; When the key is pressed together with the
inverter off key (R), the inverter will be cut off
5.3
Startup
5.3.1 Perform the following check prior to startup

Check that the input voltage is within the rated input voltage range.
- 110 -
Check that the input frequency is within the rated input frequency range.
Check that the sequence rotation of input power is correct.
Check that all load switches at output ends are in open position.
Check that all air-circuit-breakers and changeover switches on DC panels are in open position.
Check that foreign matters are removed from inside the UPS.
5.3.2 Normal starting procedure
Close the RESERVE air switches. At this point, the reserve power source (F) and output (L) LEDs
turn on, power has been supplied to the static reserve power switch circuit, output ends and the UPS
and the fans begin to run.
Close the RECTIFER air switch, If the input power has a correct phase rotation, the rectifiers will be
automatically activated and DC busbar voltage will be slowly built up (15 to 30 seconds) After the
DC busbar voltage has been built up, DC voltage may be supplied to inverters and the rectifier (G)
LED will turn on.
Close the BATTERY switch: for the sake of safety, a fuse link is mounted between the DC panel and
DC busbar voltage to avoid abnormal situations. When the BATTERY switch is closed and the
rectifiers can not supply DC power to inverters, DC electric energy will be immediately supplied to
inverters.
Press the inverter activation switch: In order to activate inverters, the inverter activation switch (P)
must be pressed together with the inverter control switch (Q). The inverters will build up voltage at
its output and the inverter (I) LED will turn on about 7s after it is put into operation. After another 3
seconds, the static switch will automatically change output load from reserve power source to
inverter output, and the static switch (J) LED will turn on. Now, the UPS has been put into
operation.
Close the UPS OUTPUT air switch.
Check that the indication on LCD is correct: all alarm LEDs on the right side of the panel should
remain Off and the two LEDs (INVERTER ON and INVERTER SS) on the left side should
remain On.
5.4
Shutdown
5.4.1
General shutdown procedures

When the system is in normal operation, shut down it observing the following procedures: Press the
inverter off switch (R) together with control switch (Q). In this case, the static switch will
automatically make the reserve power source to take over the load from inverters. The output
voltage interruption will not occur.
5.4.2
Complete shutdown procedures

When the system is in normal operation, shut down the complete UPS using the following
procedures:
Open the UPS OUTPUT air switch: firstly determine that the output load is not in use, before
opening the output air switch. No power output will exist and the equipments will be damaged if the
output air switch is opened when the output is in use. After the output air switch is opened, the
voltage is unavailable at output (or load).
Close the inverter switch: in order to shut down inverters, it is necessary to press the inverter off
switch (R) and inverter control switch (Q) at a time. In this case, the static switch will cause the
reserve power supply take over the load and the interruption of output voltage will not occur.
Open the BATTERY switch: if all UPS power sources need be totally turned off, please continue to
open the BATTERY switch so that the rectifier can store energy in DC busbar only.
- 111 -
Open the RECTIFIER air switch: After the rectifier air switch is opened, the rectifier can not build
up DC power supply to DC busbar form mains input and the DC busbar will slowly release
electrical energy. The electric energy will be completely released after about 5 min (below 20VDC).
Open the RESERVE air switch.
All power sources have been turned off, LCD and LED turn off and the UPS is totally shut down.
5.5
Load Changeover to Service Bypass

If the UPS need be repaired and maintained, change over the UPS to service bypass mode.
Before changeover to the service bypass, please confirm that mains supply takes over the load.
Shut down the inverter: in order to shut down inverters, it is necessary to press the inverter off
switch (R) and inverter control switch (Q) at a time. In this case, the static switch will cause the
reserve power supply take over the load and the interruption of output voltage will not occur.
Open the BATTERY switch: if all UPS power sources need be cut off, firstly open the BATTERY
switch so that the rectifier can store energy in DC busbar only.
Open the RECTIFIER air switch: After the rectifier air switch is opened, the rectifier can not convert
AC voltage to DC voltage to DC busbar and the DC busbar will slowly release electric energy. It
takes about 5 min to completely release the electric energy (below 20VDC).
Close the service bypass air switch: When the bypass air switch is closed, the reserve power air
switch and reserve power static switch are still in closed state. Because the bypass circuit has a low
impedance, the power source will be changed over from reserve power circuit to bypass circuit and
power is uninterruptedly supplied to the load.
Open the RESERVE air switch: now, the reserve air switch may be opened to release electric energy
from the UPS. Therefore, no electric energy exists inside the UPS and the safety of maintenance or
repair personnel can be ensured.
Open the UPS OUTPUT air switch: in this case, the output LED will turn off and the loads are fully
disconnected from inverters so that power can not be supplied from the load to inverters.
5.6
Change over the load from service bypass to inverters

Close the RESERVE power air switch. At this point, the reserve power source LED turns on, electric
energy exist in the static reserve power switch circuit and the UPS and the fans begin to run.
Close the UPS OUTPUT air switch. Electric energy exists in the output.
Open the service bypass air switch: When the bypass air switch is in closed state, never close the
inverter switch (because the CPU will check that AC power is supplied to the air switch, in order to
prevent direct connection between mains input and inverters). If the bypass air switch is opened after
the reserve source air switch is closed, the reserve source circuit will continue to supply power and
AC output is not interrupted.
Close the RECTIFER air switch, if the input power has a correct phase rotation, the rectifiers will be
automatically activated and DC busbar voltage will be slowly built up (15 to 30 seconds) After the
DC busbar voltage has been built up, DC voltage may be supplied to inverters.
Press the inverter activation switch: In order to activate inverters, the inverter activation switch (P)
must be pressed together with the inverter control switch (Q). The inverters will begin operation.
Inverter output building-up is completed about 7s After another 3s, the static switch will
automatically change output load from reserve power source to inverter output. Now, the UPS has
been put into operation.
Close the BATTERY switch: For the purpose of increased safety, a fuse is used between the DC
panel and DC busbar to protect against danger due to an abnormal condition. When the rectifier
malfunctions, the DC panel will supply DC voltage to inverters immediately.
- 112 -
Check for correct LCD display: Change over LCD menus to check whether the indication on LCD is
in accordance with the actual situation and an alarm is active.
5.7
Operating mode:
The UPS may be operated under four different operating modes, namely normal mode, backup mode,
reserve power mode and service bypass mode.
5.7.1
Normal mode
3Q4
3KM3
3Q3
BYPASS MAINS
1230V,50Hz
1P2W
3Q1
MAINS INPUT
3400V,50Hz
3P3W
3T1
3L1(3L2) 3A1
3A2
3L3
3T2
3KM2
3Q5
OUTPUT
1220V/230V
50Hz
1P2W
3Q2
BATTERY INPUT
220V/110V
When
normal mains input is available, rectifiers convert AC voltage into DC voltage, supply DC voltage to
inverters and charge batteries (when provided with a charger). During conversion, the rectifiers can
eliminate surge, noise and unstable frequency in mains input and therefore ensure that inverters can
supply stable and clean power to the load.
5.7.2
Battery backup mode

3Q4
MAINS INPUT
3400V,50Hz
3P3W
3KM3
3Q3
BYPASS MAINS
1230V,50Hz
1P2W
3Q1
3T1
3L1(3L2) 3A1
3L3
3A2
3T2
3KM2
3Q5
OUTPUT
1220V/230V
50Hz
1P2W
3Q2
BATTERY INPUT
220V/110V
When mains input fails, the DC power source will rapidly replace rectifiers to supply DC input to
inverters. Therefore, the AC output converted by inverters will not be interrupted and the load
connected with the output can be well protected.
5.7.3
Bypass reserve power mode

3Q4
MAINS INPUT
3400V,50Hz
3P3W
3KM3
3Q3
BYPASS MAINS
1230V,50Hz
1P2W
3Q1
3T1
3L1(3L2) 3A1
3L3
3A2
3T2
3KM2
3Q5
OUTPUT
1220V/230V
50Hz
1P2W
3Q2
BATTERY INPUT
220V/110V
When an inverter failure, such as overtemperature, short-circuit, abnormal output voltage or

- 113 -
overload, occurs, the inverters will automatically stop operation. If the mains input is abnormal, the
static switch will be changed over to the reserve power output for use by the load.
5.7.4
Service bypass mode

3Q4
3Q3
BYPASS MAINS
1230V,50Hz
1P2W
MAINS INPUT
3400V,50Hz
3P3W
3Q1
3T1
3L1(3L2) 3A1
3KM3
3L3
3A2
3T2
3KM2
3Q5
OUTPUT
1220V/230V
50Hz
1P2W
3Q2
BATTERY INPUT
220V/110V
If routine maintenance of the UPS is required or the DC panel provided by power plants need be
replaced and the output can not be interrupted, users may firstly stop inverters, close the service
bypass air switch and then open the rectifier and bypass air switches. Thus, AC output supplied to
the load will not be interrupted during this changeover. No AC or DC voltage exist in the UPS
except for the output transformers, therefore ensuring the safety of maintenance personnel.
Operating environment of UPS:

The UPS should operate at a ambient temperature smaller than 25 and relative humidity smaller
than 80%.
- 114 -
Chapter VII Protection and Automatic Device

1
General Provisions on Protections and Automatic Devices

The new relaying protection and automatic devices must be accomplished with complete drawings
(schematic drawings, exploded drawings, installation drawings and setpoint lists etc). The protective
modules, relays, test elements and secondary terminals must be clearly and correctly marked, the
alarm window signals are in order and the texts are legible.
When primary equipments are put into operation, the relevant protections should be enabled. If the
protections can not be enabled due to failures, it is prohibited to put primary equipments into
operation. When primary equipments are used as hot standby, the relevant protections should be
enabled. When primary equipments are used as cold standby, it is no necessary to stop protections.
Relaying protections and automatic devices for equipment in operation shall be in accordance with
the actual situations.
The drawings for relaying protections and automatic devices must be in accordance with the actual
situations and all modification to secondary circuits and wirings should be recorded on the relaying
protection logs by professional personnel.
Startup and shutdown of relaying protection and automatic devices as well as operations on the
protection secondary circuits must be subjected to the approval of dispatchers or shift supervisors.
Operators should not work on secondary circuits. When inspecting and dealing with defects in
circuit-breaker control and signal circuits, it is strictly prohibited to remove secondary wirings.
Before relaying protection personnel commence works on protection and secondary circuits,
operators must review permits to work and safety measures. Before the set values or secondary
wiring is modified, obtain set value notices, reports and drawings approved by the relevant
departments. Operators should check equipment conditions against permits to work and take safety
actions. If any work may cause malfunction of the protection, operators must take appropriate
measures to prevent protection malfunction.
After relaying protection personnel have completed their works, operators should check that wirings,
protective elements and marks previously removed have been replaced, links are in correct positions
and works are clearly recorded on relaying protection logs.
In order to prevent protection malfunction during equipment operation, it is not allowed to perform
any work which may cause relaying protection panel vibration, such as drilling. If necessary to
perform such operations, it is necessary to take appropriate measures or disable instantaneous
protection.
When relaying protection personnel finds any abnormal condition (such as DC system grounding) or
circuit-breaker tripping, operators should immediately urge protection personnel to stop operation
and remain systems at current state. After the causes have been investigated and is deemed not to be
associated with the operation, it is allowed to continue such operation.
It is not allowed that transformer gas protection is out of service together with differential protection.
Either transformer gas protection or differential protection may be out of service after obtaining
approval from dispatchers or shift supervisors. When both differential protection and gas protection
are put into operation at a time, the backup protection may be out of service for a short time if
approved by dispatchers.
After works on differential protection's AC circuits are completed, operators can enable differential
protections only when receiving notices from relaying protection personnel.
The following check should be performed if a protection need be enabled during normal operation.
(1). For operational relaying protections, records indicating that they can be put into operation
should be available on protection logs.
(2). All protective elements, links and CT terminals are in correct position and are set to
- 115 -
correct values and all secondary miniature busbar should be connected.

(3). Trip links can be connected only when voltage across measuring links is zero.
If any of the following abnormal conditions which may cause protection malfunction is found
during operation, immediately report to shift supervisors or dispatchers. In case of emergencies, it is
allowed to firstly deactivate the protection and then report to shift supervisors and inform relaying
protection personnel.
(1) A relay smokes or catches fire.
(2) A relay protective element malfunctions.
(3) A signal which may cause malfunction, such as 1YH broken wire in generator voltage
circuits and broken wire in differential circuits, appears.
(4) Other conditions which may cause malfunction.
Operators should accurately record and immediately report operation signals of relaying protections
to dispatchers or shift supervisors.
Patrol Inspection on Protections and Automatic Devices

The protections and automatic devises are correctly started and stopped in accordance with the
operating modes of primary equipments.
The status LED, test LED and signal LED of the protections should conform to actual operating
conditions and the protective modules in various levels have not malfunction signals.
Power switches of microprocessor-based protections are in normal positions and standby power
switches are in standby state.
The terminals of secondary circuits are secure and free from looseness or overheating.
Relay covers are in good order and free of crack; glass covers are free of moisture and have an intact
lead seal.
The relay cores are in order, relay contacts are in correct position and free of jittering, burning or
blackout.
Relay coils are free of overheating, discoloration, smell, abnormal noises and smoke.
The relay interiors are free of abnormal noises, contacts are free of jittering and coils are free of
overheating.
Links, changeover switches, blade switches, fuses, test elements and test terminals are in correct
position and securely fixed.
Signal relays don't malfunction.
Generator Transformer Unit Protection
3.1 Brief introduction

The generator-transformer unit protections consist of 2 sets of RCS-985A generator transformer
protections and 1 set of RCS-974A transformer non-electrical and auxiliary protection,
manufactured by Nari-Relays Electric Co., Ltd. Each set of protection have three panels and all
protective components are mounted inside three cabinets. It can provide main protection, protection
against abnormal operation and backup protection in redundant mode. Operational circuits and
non-electrical protections are mounted inside a separate panel. Two sets of RCS-985A receive
signals from different groups of TA, main protection and backup protection share one group of TA
and outputs correspond to different tripping coils. The protections have the following benefits:
(1). Simple structure and secondary circuit design;
(2). Easy operation, high safety and reliability and meeting countermeasure requirements;
(3). Convenient setting, commissioning and maintenance.
- 116 -
3.2 Protective Functions of RCS-985A

Generator protection
Longitudinal differential protection
Power frequency change differential protection
Split-phase transverse differential protection
High-sensitivity transverse differential protection
Longitudinal zero-sequence interturn protection of voltage type
Power-frequency variable directional interturn protection
Generator stator single-phase earth failure protection
Foundational wave zero sequence voltage protection for generator stator earth failure
Third harmonic voltage protection for generator stator earth failure
Generator excitation circuit earth failure protection
Generator rotor single-point earth failure protection
Generator rotor two-point earth failure protection
Generator stator short circuit backup protection
Generator phase-to-phase impedance protection
Composite-voltage overcurrent protection
Generator terminal large-current blocking function (output contact)
Generator protection against abnormal operation
Generator loss-of-excitation protection
Generator loss-of-synchronism protection
Generator reverse power protection
Generator sequential tripping and reverse power protection
Under-frequency protection
Over-frequency protection
Generator over-excitation protection (definite time lag and reverse time lag)
Generator over-voltage protection
Definite and inverse time stator overload protection
Definite and inverse time rotor negative-sequence overload protection
Definite time over-excitation protection
Inverse time over-excitation protection
Inadvertent energizing protection
Generator starting/shutdown protection
Generator shaft current protection
Generator shaft voltage protection
Generator loss-of-voltage protection
Incomplete-phase operation
Balance-of-voltage function
- 117 -
Broken TA and TV wire judgment

Main MT protection
Differential generator transformer protection
Differential MT protection
Differential MT power frequency change protection
Abnormal operation and backup protection for MT
Impedance protection for MTs HV side
Composite-voltage overcurrent protection for MTs HV side
Zero-sequence overcurrent protection for MTs HV side
Zero-sequence directional overcurrent protection for MTs HV side
Zero-sequence overvoltage protection for MTs HV side gap
Zero-sequence overcurrent protection for MTs HV side gap
Zero-sequence earth alarm for MT's LV side
Definite and inverse time over-excitation protection for MT
MT overload signal
MT cooling fan starting
Broken TV wire
Broken TA wire
HV auxiliary transformer protection
Differential HV auxiliary transformer protection
Composite-voltage overcurrent protection for HV auxiliary transformer
Composite-voltage overcurrent protection for Branch A
Composite-voltage overcurrent protection for Branch B
Zero-sequence overcurrent protection for Branch A
Zero-sequence overcurrent protection for Branch B
Zero-sequence voltage alarm for Branch A
Zero-sequence voltage alarm for Branch B
Auxiliary transformer overload signal
Cooling fan start
Overcurrent output
Broken TV wire
Broken TA wire
Excitation transformer protection
Differential protection
Overcurrent protection
Overload protection (definite time lag and reverse time lag)
Broken TA wire judgment
Other protective functions (RCS-974A transformer non-electrical and auxiliary protection)
- 118 -
Circuit-breaker pickup failure protection

Incomplete-phase protection for circuit-breakers
Non-electrical protection (RCS-974A transformer non-electrical and auxiliary protection)
Transformers, heavy and light gas of on-load tap changer, pressure relief, oil level& temperature,
temperature and coolers totally stopped
Protection for I& C, water failure and excitation system failures
Over-frequency generator tripping
Communication and auxiliary functions
Communication functions (The device has 4 RS-485 ports, 2 multiple optical ports, 1 service port,
IEC870-5-103 communication protocol, LFP communication protocol, MODUS communication
protocol, via which the device can be connected to DCS systems).
CPU boards: protective and recording functions, MON board: 4s (or 8s) continuous recording
function. Data is compatible with COMTRADE format and is not missed during power failure
Windows-based operation management systems are provided and the protection may be directly
connected with MIS systems.
3.3
Generator transformer Unit Protection Configuration
3.3.1 Electrical protection configuration

Main protection: Longitudinal differential protection for generators, generator interturn
(Longitudinal zero-sequence voltage or transverse differential protection), MT longitudinal
differential, generator-transformer unit differential and HV auxiliary transformer differential
protection.
Generator backup protection and protection against abnormal operation: symmetrical overload
(reverse time), unsymmetrical overload (reverse time), composite voltage overcurrent, sequential
tripping and reverse power, overvoltage, loss-of-excitation, loss-of-step, 100% station earth,
over-excitation (reverse time), startup& shutdown, single-point rotor earth, two-point earth ,
excitation circuit overload (reverse time), low frequency protection, broken TA and TV protection. ,
MT backup protection and protection against abnormal operation: MT impedance, zero-sequence
current, overload, fan starting, broken TA and TV wire protection.
Backup ion transformer protection and protection against abnormal operation: composite-voltage
overcurrent, delayed rapid breaking and composite-voltage overcurrent protection for Branch A and
B, zero-sequence overcurrent, overload and fan starting protection for Branch A and B
Excitation transformer protection: differential protection and overcurrent protection etc.
Other protections: Startup failure protection and non-all-phase operation protection.
Electrical protections are in dual configuration and each set has identical configuration and
composed of two layers of fully independent RCS-985A housings. The redundant main protective
circuits of the same components are independent from each other, and the redundant protective
circuits of the same components are independent from each other. Each set of protection can operate
separately for a long time.
3.3.2 Non-electrical protection
It is housed in a separate cabinet and its output is fully independent from the ones for electrical
protection. The main functions are as follows:
MT gas protection, temperature, winding temperature, pressure relief, cooler stop and oil level etc.
HV auxiliary transformer gas protection, temperature, pressure relief, cooler stop and oil level etc.
- 119 -
Non-electrical contacts at transient outputs, such as gas, directly actuate the output relays and CPU
software can issue signals and mange printing.
Non-electrical parameters which need be delayed is sent and signaled by CPU software.
3.3.3
Description of RCS-985A protection operation

a)
Normal operating state
Indicating lamps are described below:

Green RUN lamp: it turns on when the protection is in normal operation, and turns off when the
protection is out of service.
Yellow TV BROKEN lamp: it turns on when the TV failures or is broken;
Yellow TA BROKEN lamp: it turns on when the TA failures or is broken or differential current is
abnormal;
Yellow ALARM lamp: it turns on when the protection generates an alarm;
Red TRIP lamp: it turns on when the protection is triggered. It turns off when the protection drop out
and the RESET button is pressed or a remote reset signal is received.
b)
Operating conditions and description

(1)
The protective output may be enabled or disabled by means of output trip links.
(2) A protective function may be separately enabled or disabled through panel-mounted links,
internal links and control words.
(3) The protection always detects hardware circuits and operating status. In case self test
failure, inform relaying protection personnel. In case of a fatal failure (notes; indicated with a *
symbol), the protection will block all functions and the RUN lamp will turn off. Otherwise, some
protective functions will be ineffective and an alarm signal will be issued.
(4) For cooling fan starting and voltage regulation blocking, the protections will send a
message other than an alarm signal (notes; indicated with a # symbol).
c)
Protection blocking and alarm

(1) When the CPU detects a hardware failure, the entire protection will be blocked. Hardware
failures include RAM failure, program memory error, EEPROM error, invalid set value,
optoelectronic isolator loss-of-voltage alarm, DSP error and trip output failure etc. In this case,
the protection can not continue to operate.
(2) When the CPU detects a long starting time, unacceptable starting, internal communication
error, broken TA, broken TV and alarm signals, the protection will issue an alarm signal. In this
case, the protection can continue to operate.
3.3.4
Description of RCS-974A protection operation

a)
Indicating lamps are described below: The green RUN lamp turns on when the protection is in
normal operation, and turns off when the protection is out of service. The yellow ALARM lamp
turns on when the protection detects a failure. The red ELECTRIC TRIP lamp turns on when the
non-all-phase protection is triggered and output; The red NON-ELECTRICAL DEALYED TRIP
lamp turns on when the delayed non-electrical protection is triggered and output. The 1, 2, 3
16 lamps turn on when the external non-electrical signal contacts are closed. The protection
ALARM lamp will automatically turn off when a failure is cleared. The ELECTRIC TRIP,
DELAYED NON-ELECTRICAL TRIP and 1, 2, 316 lamps turn off only when the signal
reset button is pressed or remote reset signal is received.
b)
Operating conditions and description

- 120 -
(1)
The protective output may be enabled or disabled by means of output trip links.
(2) A protective function may be separately enabled or disabled through panel-mounted hard
links or control words.
(3) The protection always detects hardware circuits and operating status. In case of a fatal
failure (notes; indicated with a * symbol), the protection will block all protective functions and
the RUN lamp will turn off. If other failures occur, only some protective functions will be
disabled.
c)
Protection blocking and alarm

(1) When CPU detects a hardware failure, the entire protection will be blocked. Hardware
failures include memory failure, program area error, illegal set value, optoelectronic isolator
loss-of-voltage alarm, DSP error, CPU sampling failure and trip output failure etc. In this case,
the protection can not continue to operate.
(2) When the CPU detects a long starting time, failure TA, start failure, the protection will
issue an alarm signal. In this case, the protection can continue to operate.
3.3.5
Provisions on turning on or off protective links

Due to interference between two sets of rotor earth failure protections, only one set is enabled. When
a protection need be disabled, another set of rotator earth failure protection should be enabled.
The links for startup& shutdown and power-on error protection should be set to ON when the
generator transformer unit is disconnected from power grids, and be set to OFF when the generator
transformer unit is connected with power grids.
After the generator transformer unit is disconnected from power grids, the output links used to trip
the relevant circuit-breakers on non-electrical protective panels should be set to OFF
Microprocessor-based Generator Synchronizer

WX-98F/8 synchronizer is an automatically microprocessor-based one used for synchronization
between power generating sets and power grids and between substation busbar and lines. It is
characterized by high safety, high reliability, fast response, high accuracy and multiple functions.
Meanwhile, during synchronization, the synchronizer can protect against and generate an alarm for
high or low system voltage, high or low system frequency, high or low unit voltage, high or low unit
frequency, broken voltage circuit wire and over-excitation, etc.
4.1
Main Functions of Synchronizer

Broken wire blocking for voltage circuit and undervoltage blocking
If a wire in voltage circuit is broken or synchronizing voltage is lower than the set value during
synchronization, the device will refuse synchronization, generate an alarm and indicate that the
generator voltage or system voltage is too low.
Overvoltage and over-excitation protection
A high generator voltage may cause over-excitation of the generators (including transformers in case
of the generator transformer set). The device can protect generators against over-voltage and
over-excitation. When the generator voltage exceeds the preset value, the device will refuse
synchronization and generate an alarm. The over-voltage can be preset.
Overfrequency or underfrequency protection
In order to ensure that the generator is connected with power grids safely, the device is provided
with overfrequency or underfrequency protective abilities. When the preset frequency value is
exceeded, the device will refuse synchronization and generate an alarm. The high and low frequency
threshold may be preset for systems and generators, respectively.
The device supports line voltage synchronization and phase voltage synchronization.
- 121 -
The device is able to automatically compensate phase angle and voltage difference caused by MT's
delta or Y-connection without the need for a corner transformer.
The device is able to measure the closing time of synchronized circuit-breakers in real-time way.
A commissioning module which can generating synchronizing voltage having adjustable frequency
and amplitude (phase) is built in the device for the use for tests.
The device can be flexibly started up.
Manual startup, automatic startup, single-shot starting and multiple-shot startup may be
accomplished by varying input terminal wiring combination to facilitate the coordination with
manual control, DCS system and ECS systems.
Control signals and object selection signals may be either long pulse ones or short pulse ones
depending on users selection.
The device has SYNCHRONIZATION IN PROGRESS output contacts and a RESET contact used
to cancel synchronization in case of emergencies.
The device has communication ports.
The device has 2 RS-485 ports. One port (A1, B1) transmits device operation and alarm information
via MODBUS communication protocol. A waveform diagram may also be sent when necessary.
Synchronization meters and real-time information may be displayed on a PC via another port (A2
and B2, which may be RS-232).
The device can greatly simplify multi-objective synchronization wiring together with YAC-2000
smart control boxes and GR-3C smart control boxes.
Voltage-free synchronization may be performed when necessary.
Chinese MMI
Easy operation, commissioning and maintenance
The device may be time synchronized to 1 s through GPS.
4.2
Entire Operation Process of Synchronizers

The DCS chooses and maintain a synchronizing point.
In order to ensure that the synchronizers perform SYNCHRONIZATION METER, SINGLE-SIDE
VOLTAGE-FREE closing and DOUBLE-SIDE VOLTAGE-FREE closing, the DCS will set and
maintain the relevant digital input. This step will be skipped for synchronization operation.
The synchronizer is turned on and its contact is a short signal;
The DCS starts up the synchronizer and its contact is a short signal;
The synchronizer is started up and cause circuit-breakers to be closed;
The synchronizer is turned off under the control of the DCS and its contact is a short signal;
The DCS reset the SYNCHRONIZATION POINT SELECTION, SINGLE-SIDE LOSS OF
VOTLAGE confirmation and DOUBLE-SIDE LOSS OF VOTLAGE confirmation signals;
If the DCS selects the SYNCHRONIZATION METER in the second step, the synchronizer is
mainly used as a synchronization meter and real-time parameters such as voltage and frequency may
be displayed on screens. If AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY REGULATION and AUTOMATIC
VOLTAGE REGULATION parameters are chosen, the frequency and voltage may be controlled;
hut closing control will not be performed.
150kV Circuit-breaker Protection
5.1 150kV Circuit-breaker Protective Functions

One protective panel is provided for each 150kV circuit-breaker and contains failure protection,
- 122 -
three-phase discrepancy protection, recloser, dead zone protection, charging protection and
phase-splitting control box. Circuit-breakers only associated with transformers have not reclosing
ability. There are isolators in 3 sets of generator transformer sets, startup/ backup transformers HV
side and 4 outgoing lines. Redundant stub protection is provided.
5.2 Technical Requirements for Automatic Reclosing
One-shot automatic reclosing mode is adopted and many-shot reclosing is forbidden in any case.
Reclosing starting mode
a Automatic reclosing is triggered by line protection tripping contacts from tripped
positions.
b Automatic reclosing is triggered phase-splitting and three-phase tripping circuits.
Three-phase reclosing should be subjected to synchronization check and voltage check.
c
After receiving starting pulse, the recloser can hold the starting signal for a preset time.
Reclosing block mode

Reclosers should have input circuits used to block reclosing. The input is connected to reclosing
block contacts in case of manual tripping, manual closing, busbar failure, transformer failures,
circuit-breaker failure, circuit-breaker three-phase discrepancy, remote tripping, delayed protection
and drop in circuit-breaker operating pressure. After the three-phase reclosing elements are actuated,
the single-phase reclosing time elements should be blocked.
This reclosing is used for 1 1 circuit-breakers and therefore each line has two circuit-breakers. The
circuit-breaker will be firstly closed when the FIRST RECLOSER ON links are closed. A
single-shot closing pulse (pulse time: 120ms) will be sent after a short delay time (preset for
reclosing). When the first recloser picks up, a CLOSING RECLOSER signal will be sent. If the first
recloser drops out and a reclosing pulse is not sent, the FIRST RECLOSER BLOCKED contact will
instantaneously drops out. If the first recloser has sent a reclosing pulse, the contact will drop out
only after the device begins to drop out. When first reclosing is used together with subsequent
reclosing, the FIRST RECLOSER BLOCKED output contacts of the first recloser will be connected
to the FIRST RECLOSER BLOCKED input contacts of the subsequent recloser.
The circuit-breaker will be subsequently re-closed when the FIRSTLY CLOSING ON links are
opened The reclosing pulse is sent after a long delay time (set re-closing time +subsequent reclosing
delay time). When the first recloser is maintained or out of service, it will not send a FIRST
RECLOSER BLOCKED signal. In this case, the subsequent recloser will pick up after the preset
reclosing delay time to eliminate unnecessary delay time and ensure system stability.
Reclosing modes
There are the following several reclosing modes: 1. adaptive reclosing mode; 2. Ordinary reclosing
mode; 3. reclosing shutdown mode. For simple operation, the ADAPTIVE RECLOSING ON in the
protection for #1 and #2 line and the RECLOSING ON and ADAPTIVE RECLOSING ON in
RSC921-A should set to 1. The protective links for tripping starting circuit-breakers, closing starting
circuit-breaker protection and the protection block circuit-breaker reclosing on #1 and #2 protective
panels should be ON. The reclosing mode changeover switch on #1 and #2 protective panels should
be in OFF position. The FIRST RECLOSING LINK on ? ? circuit-breaker protective panel should
be ON. The FIRST RECLOSING LINK on ? ? circuit-breaker protective panel should be OFF.
Reclosing modes are changed over by means of the following changeover switches and hard links.
- 123 -
Reclosing
modes
Circuit-breaker protective panel
Reclosing
mode switch
Adaptive
reclosing ON
Common
reclosing ON
Reclosing OFF
Single-shot
reclosing
Single-shot
reclosing
Out of service
Protective panel
for #1 line
Link
of
three-phase trip
through
communication
line
Protective panel
for #2 line
Link
of
three-phase trip
through
communication
line
Adaptive
reclosing
link ON
Reclosing
output link
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
For manual closing or reclosing of intermediate circuit-breakers, only the protection of energized
lines or lines which failure previously should be accelerated. It is not allowed to accelerate the
protection of nearby good lines.
The reclosing pulse should be wide enough (120ms) to ensure reliable closing and prevent
secondary reclosing or bouncing.
Re-closing time
a The single-phase reclosing time and three-phase reclosing time may be adjusted
respectively. The time may be adjustable between 0.3s and 9.9s in a step of 0.1s (or lower).
b After reclosing pickup, the resetting time of entire groups is adjustable between 1 and 99s.
During the time, signals which will be sent to the protection for three-phase trip should be held.
In case any component of a recloser is damaged or failure, multiple-shot reclosing and
three-phase reclosing forbidden should not occur. Two-shot reclosing should not occur in any
case.
When a recloser is being reset, out of service, blocked or failures, triple tripping circuit of the
circuit-breaker should be connected.
A recloser has a circuit which blocks reclosing in case of low circuit-breaker operating pressure The
circuit only ensure that the operating pressure is appropriable before circuit-breaker tripping.
A recloser should provide adequate output contacts to accelerate delayed protection.
A recloser should provide the protection with sufficient, independent output contacts so as to protect
three-phase trip in case of the following conditions:
a
Reclosing on failure lines
b When the reclosing selective switch is in RECLOSING OFF position or THREE-PHASE

RECLOSING position.
c
A recloser failures
There are sufficient amount of signal circuit contact output:

a There are three pairs of independent reclosing actuation signal output contacts, which are
used for startup central signals, even recorders and remote signals.
b When a recloser is out of service, there are one pair of independent signal output contact
for starting central signals
c
Recloser failure signal
After the loss of DC power, there are signal output contacts for the use by central signals.
Three-phase trip through communication line

- 124 -
a After two phases are tripped due to a transferable failure (failures transferable from Phase
A to B) in protected lines or other reasons, it is necessary to trip the third phase as soon as
possible.
b When a single-phase failure occurs in the protected lines and it is necessary to trip three
phases due to automatic reclosing (for example, reclosing is not allowable due to reduced
operating gas (hydraulic) pressure), the circuit-breakers must be three-phase tripped.
c For circuit used for three-phase trip through communication line of reclosers, the reclosers
constitute tripping logic and the line protection does not provide output trip contacts for
three-phase trip through communication line.
5.3
Circuit-breaker Failure Protection

Circuit-breaker failure protection should take account of failure phase failure, non-failure phase
failure and generator-transformer three-phase trip failure. In addition, the failure protection will also
be triggered when the energization protection is active.
Failure phase failure: After the line protection trip contacts and high failure overcurrent setpoint are
actuated, a three-phase tripping command is sent after a Failure Tripping Delay Time to trip the
circuit-breaker and then the nearby circuit-breakers are tripped after a Failure Actuation Time.
Non-failure phase failure: The three-phase tripping input contact hold high failed overcurrent
setpoint elements and the low failed overcurrent setpoint elements operate continuously. In this case,
the output actuation logics firstly send three-phase tripping commands to trip the circuit-breaker
after a Failure Tripping Delay Time and then trip the nearby circuit-breakers after a Failure
Actuation Time.
Generator-transformer three-phase trip failure: The generator-transformer three-phase trip failure
protection may be triggered by three criteria, namely, low power factor, negative-sequence
overcurrent and zero-sequence overcurrent. The three auxiliary criteria may be ON or OFF through
a setting control word. In this case, the output actuation logics firstly send three-phase tripping
commands to trip the circuit-breaker after a Failure Tripping Delay Time and then trip the nearby
circuit-breakers after a Failure Actuation Time.
Energization protection starting failure: If the failure protection is ON when the energization
protection is triggered, the nearby circuit-breakers are tripped after a Failure Actuation Time.
5.4 Three-phase Discrepancy

When the discrepancy protection is ON, the TWJ of any phase is actuated and the current is zero, the
contacts of this phase are deemed to be in tripped position. If any pole is in tripped position and the
remaining two phases are not in tripped position, three phases are considered as discrepant. The
discrepancy protection may be open to zero-sequence current or negative-sequence current and
enabled or disabled by control words. When the settable actuation time meet the discrepancy
actuation conditions, its output will trip the circuit-breaker.
5.5 RCS-922A Stub Protection
RCS922-A digital stub protective devise is mainly used for stub protection. It may also be used for
line energization protection. RCS922A adopts differential current ratio mode. The differential
ratio protection is enabled when the auxiliary contacts of line blade switches or the ones of the
output blade switches on MT HV side are closed or the protective links on panels are ON, and the
differential protection control word is set to 1. The starting elements of the devices is accomplished
by overcurrent relays reflecting the change in frequency and supplemented by zero-sequence
overcurrent relays reflecting full current. The line energization protection is composed of 2 sections
of overcurrent protection The setting control word control is enabled through panel-mounted
protective links, line isolating switches and energization protection.
RCS-924A Zone T protective device is mainly used to protect Zone T connected in 1 1mode. The
- 125 -
device is composed of differential current protection of three-side and line energization protection.
When the line isolator is opened, the differential current protection of three-side will be
automatically changed to differential current protection of two-side and two-section overcurrent
protection on line side will be open.
5.6 Circuit-breaker Operator Box
An operational box for circuit-breakers is device for use with circuit-breakers having 2 split-phase
tripping coils and 1 closing coil. When the protection is triggered or circuit-breakers are manually
operated, the operational relay box can trip, close and reclose circuit-breakers.
The operational relay box has split-phase tripping circuits, three-phase tripping circuits, permanent
tripping (not reclosing) circuits, manual tripping circuits and tripping holding circuits.
The operational relay box has reclosing circuits, manual closing circuits and anti-bouncing circuit
for manual closing on permanent failures.
It has a reclosing pressure and tripping pressure monitor circuit to prevent damage to
circuit-breakers due to abnormal operating gas (hydraulic) pressure.
It has closing position relays and tripping position relays
It has protection acceleration or blocking circuits, reclosing starting and blocking circuits and
circuits to HF protections.
It should have necessary signal outputs: tripping signal, low circuit-breaker gas (hydraulic) pressure
signal, loss-of-DC current of tripping and closing circuits, broken control wire signal, circuit-breaker
position signal and remote signals.
In order to ensure that reclosing and failure protection are not triggered due to tripped output of
non-electrical generator transformer protection, the two tripping coil operational circuits of three
circuit-breaker protective cabinets associated with MT have circuits connected with non-electrical
MT protection. It is started by the tripping contacts of non-electrical MT protections and the circuits
are connected to tripping circuits of Phase A, B and C.
150kV Line Protection

The 150kV line protection consists of one set of RCS-902A digital rapid ultra-HV line protective
device and one set of RCS-9611C line protection and measurement device.
6.1
RCS-902A Digital Rapid Ultra HV Line Protective Device (for 150kV Line)
6.1.1 Device Function

RCS-902A consists of a main protection and quick section I protection. The main protection is based
on longitudinal distance element and zero-sequence distance elements and the quick section I
protection is composed of power frequency variation distance elements. RCS-902A has a complete
backup protection consisting of three-section phase-to-phase protection, earth distance protection
and two zero-sequence directional overcurrent protection. RCS-902A protection has split outputs
and auto-reclosers which perform single-phase reclosing, three-phase reclosing and general
reclosing of circuit-breakers connected with single or double busbar.
6.1.2
Performance Characteristics
Rapid response. The circuit-breakers are tripped within 10ms after a nearby line failure occurs and
within 15ms when an intermediate line failure occurs. The circuit-breakers are tripped within 25ms
after a remote line failure occurs. The main protection adopts fast integral algorithm and the backup
protection adopts accurate Fourier algorithm. The power frequency change measuring elements
adopts adaptive floating threshold to protect against system imbalance and interference. Therefore,
the measuring elements are safe and has fast response capability and the pickup is very sensitive and
frequent actuation can be avoided. The advanced oscillation block feature ensures that the distance
protection can be suitably blocked in case of failures beyond additional system oscillation zones,
and clear a failure occurring within additional oscillation zones. The device has auto-reclosing
- 126 -
modes. The device has an integral panel and totally-enclosed housing, traditional wiring at back
planes is eliminated. The software design also takes account of interference suppression and
electromagnetic radiation complies with the standards. The device can suitably process even
messages and store the latest 128 action events and 24 failure records. The device has a friendly and
Chinese MMI and print reports in Chinese. It is provided with flexible background communication
modes and RS-485 communication ports (optional twisted pairs, optical fiber cable) or Ethernet. It is
compatible with DL/T667-1999 (IEC60870-5-103) communication protocol. Its disturbance
recorder is compatible with COMTRADE.
6.2
SRCS-9611C Line measuring and Protective Device
6.2.1
Configuration and functions of protection

a)
Protection configurations
1 Three-section overcurrent protection which can be composite voltage and direction
blocked.
2
Three-section zero-sequence overcurrent protection
3 Fast overcurrent protection and fast zero-sequence protection (zero-sequence current may
be generated by the protection or externally applied)
4
Overload function (alarm or tripping)
Load reduction in case of low frequency
Three-phase single-shot reclosing
7 Low current grounding line selection device (zero-sequence current must be externally
applied)
8
b)
Independent operating circuit.
Measuring and control functions

1Customized 20-way digital input for remote signaling.
2 One group of circuit-breakers are remotely closed or opened (up to three groups are
optional)
3 IamIcmI0UAUBUCUABUBCUCAU0FPQCOS 14 parameters
including Iam, Icm, I0, UA, UB, UC, UAB, UBC, UCA, U0, F, P, Q, COS can be remotely
measured.
4SOE record, etc
c)
Protection information functions

1Remotely viewing device description
2
Remotely viewing system setpoint
Remotely viewing and modifying setpoint and zone Nr.
Remotely viewing, enabling, disabling and controlling soft links.
5Remotely viewing digital inputs of the protection

6 Remotely viewing device operating status (including protective element actuation, alarm
and self-test information).
7
Remotely resetting device signals
Uploading recorded failures.
The protection conforms to DL/T667-1999 (IEC60870-5-103) communication protocols and

- 127 -
equipped with Ethernet communication (100Mbps) and Category 5e cables or optical

communication ports.
6.2.2
Performance characteristics
Complete protective functions, fast response and reliable performance
Diversified operating circuit configuration which can adapt with various operating mechanisms.
Powerful optional modules which meet various field demand
The device has a totally-enclosed housing, electrical circuits are separate from electronic circuits,
the traditional wiring at back planes is eliminated. The software design also takes account of
interference suppression and electromagnetic radiation complies with the standards.
The device has complete event reporting and processing functions and is able to store the latest 64
action events, the 256 latest SOE events, 64 latest user action events and up to 8 failure events (the
failure recording time is up to 15s).
Friendly MMI and Chinese display and report.
Flexible background communication modes, Ethernet communication ports (Optional Category 5
cable or optical cable)
Several separate Ethernet ports (two or three ports are provided and specified at the time of order)
Independent and reliable channels, which supports communication among station-wide supervisory
control background and protect information workstation and dispatching centers).
6.2.3
Operation description
a)
Indicating lamps
Green RUN lamp: it turns on during normal operation

Yellow ALARM lamp: it turns on when an alarm is generated;
Red TRIP lamp: it turns on when the protection is tripped and turns off when the signal is reset.
Red CLOSING lamp: it turns on when the circuit-breaker is closed and turns off when the signal is
reset.
Green TRIPPED lamp: it turns on when the circuit-breaker is in open position.
Red CLOSED lamp: it turns on when the circuit-breaker is in the closed position.
b)
Device operation description

The RUN lamp should remain On and the ALARM lamp (yellow) should remain Off when the
device is in normal operation.
Press the ACK button on the main menu to reset all TRIPPED or CLOSED lamp and return the
LCD display to the normal screen.
7.
150kV System Busbar Protection

The 150kV system busbar protection is RCS-915E microprocessor-based busbar protection
manufactured by Nari-Relays Electric Co., Ltd. It is mainly suitable for one and a half
circuit-breaker connection mode. Up to 9 lines and elements may be connected with the busbar.
Each busbar are provided with two sets of RCS-915E microprocessor-based busbar protection.
7.1
Protection Configurations
RCS-915E microprocessor-based busbar protection is composed of differential busbar protection
and circuit-breaker failure protection.
7.2
Performance Characteristics
- 128 -
1 A different TA ratio is allowable and the TA adjustment factor is settable.

2 High-sensitivity differential ratio protection
3 New adaptive weighed criteria for TA saturation resistance
4 Integral event message processing
5 Flexible background communication, RS-485 and optical fiber communication ports (optional)
6 COMTRADE-compliant disturbance recorders
7.3
Differential Busbar Protection

It is composed of split-phase ratio differential elements.
1 Pickup elements:
The pickup element for split-phase ratio differential protection is composed of power frequency
current change elements and differential current elements. When the change in braking current is
greater than the threshold (consisting of a floating threshold and fixed threshold), the power
frequency current change elements will operate. When the differential current of any phase is greater
than the threshold, the differential current elements will operate.
2 Ratio differential elements
3 Ratio differential elements
Composed of common ratio differential elements and percentage power frequency change
differential elements.
7.4
Circuit-breaker Failure Protection

It works with the failure protection for one and a half circuit-breaker to accomplish interlocked
tripping function. When certain circuit-breaker connected with busbar fails, a failure protection
actuation contact for the circuit-breaker is sent to this device. When the digital failure input contact
picks up and the protection detect its operation, all components connected to the busbar will be
tripped as an interlock mean.
7.5
Check for Broken AC Current Circuits

1 When the large differential current is greater than the set value for broken TA wire (IDX), an
alarm will be generated to indicate TA wire breakage after a delay time of 5s.
2 Determine whether differential busbar protections are blocked after a broken TA is detected, by
setting the control word Blocking Differential Protection after TA Breakage. If the control word is
set, the differential busbar protection will be blocked when a TA wire is broken (other protection
will not be blocked). The differential busbar protection can not restore normal operation until
operators press the RESET button on a panel to reset alarms.
3 In case of 3I0>0.25Imax+0.04In in any branch, an alarm will be generated to indicate TA
failure after a delay time of 5s. This feature may be disabled by resetting the control word TA
Abnormal Imbalance Criteria ON
4 When the large differential current is greater than the TA alarm value (IDXBJ), an alarm will be
generated to indicate TA failure after a delay time of 5s.
5 When a TA failure alarm is active, the differential busbar protection will not be blocked.
Determine whether a TA failure alarm is automatically reset after the circuit becomes normal, by
using the control word Automatic Recovery after TA Failure during busbar protection setting.
7.6
7.6.1
Device Operation Description

Device Composition
- 129 -
The device is housed a 8U standard totally-enclosed housing and composed of digital input circuits,
output and signal circuits, power source modules, CPU boards, plug-in manager board and AC input
circuits.
A 9-key keypad and 4 lamps are mounted on the device panel.
Indicating lamps are described below:
Green RUN lamp, it turns on during normal operation
Red DIFFERENTIAL BUSBAR PROTECTION lamp: it turns on when the differential busbar
protection trip the busbar circuit-breakers.
Red FAILURE PROTECTION lamp: it turns on when the circuit-breaker failure protection is active.
Yellow BROKEN WIRE ALARM lamp: it turns on when AC circuits failure.
Yellow ALARM lamp: it turns on when other failures occur;
There are two pushbuttons at the right upper part of front panel. They are the signal reset button and
print button.
The RESET button is used to reset the protection and the PRINT button is used to print failure
reports. Links, including protection ON links and links at output to various connected components,
are arranged at the lower part of the cabinet. A DC air switch is mounted at the top of cabinet rear
panel.
7.6.2
Failure Information and Recommended Treatment
Self-test
Information
Protective board
(manager board)
Memory error
Protective board
(manager board)
Program error
Protective board
(manager board)
Setpoint error
Protective board
(manager board)
DSP setpoint error
Protective board
(manager board)
FPGA error
Protective board
(manager board)
CPLD error
Protective board
(manager board)
DSP error
Trip output alarm
Meaning
The protective board (manger board) RAM chip is
damaged, the DEVICE BLOCKING and OTHER
ALARM signals are issued and the protection is
blocked.
The protective board (manger board) FLASH
content is corrupted, the DEVICE BLOCKING and
OTHER ALARM signals are issued and the
protection is blocked.
The set value area of the protective board (manger
board) is corrupted, the DEVICE BLOCKING and
The checksum error of DSP set value area of the
protective board (manger board) occurs, the
DEVICE BLOCKING and OTHER ALARM
signals are issued and the protection is blocked.
The checksum error of the FPGA chip on the
protective board (manger board) is detected, the
The checksum error of the CPLD chip on the
The DSP self testing of the protective board
(manger board) failed, the FPGA is reset, the
An output transistor is damaged, the DEVICE
BLOCKING and OTHER ALARM signals are
- 130 -
Remedial Method
Immediately shut down

the protection and notify
the manufacturer.
Self-test
Information
Sampling check
error
Manager boards
generate digital
output alarm
Meaning
issued and the protection is blocked.
The digital input of the protective board and
manager board is not consistent, the DEVICE
When the protective board is not triggered, the
manger board is triggered for a long time and
generates OTHER ALARM signal, the protection is
not blocked.
Invalid setpoint in
areas
Set values in the area are invalid, the DEVICE
Self-test
Information
Protective board
(manager board)
Memory error
Protective board
(manager board)
Program error
Protective board
(manager board)
Setpoint error
Protective board
(manager board)
DSP setpoint error
Protective board
(manager board)
FPGA error
Protective board
(manager board)
CPLD error
Protective board
(manager board)
DSP error
Trip output alarm
Sampling check
error
Manager boards
generate digital
Meaning
The protective board (manger board) RAM chip is
damaged, the DEVICE BLOCKING and OTHER
ALARM signals are issued and the protection is
blocked.
The protective board (manger board) FLASH
content is corrupted, the DEVICE BLOCKING and
The set value area of the protective board (manger
board) is corrupted, the DEVICE BLOCKING and
The checksum error of DSP set value area of the
protective board (manger board) occurs, the
The checksum error of the FPGA chip on the
The checksum error of the CPLD chip on the
The DSP self testing of the protective board
(manger board) failed, the FPGA is reset, the
An output transistor is damaged, the DEVICE
The digital input of the protective board and
manager board is not consistent, the DEVICE
When the protective board is not triggered, the
manger board is triggered for a long time and
- 131 -
Remedial Method

the manufacturer.
After the set value area
number or system
parameter setpoint is set,
the set values for
differential busbar
protection and failure
protection must be re-set.
Remedial Method

the manufacturer.

Self-test
Information
output alarm
Meaning
generates OTHER ALARM signal, the protection is
not blocked.
Invalid setpoint in
areas
Set values in the area are invalid, the DEVICE
Optocoupler loss of
power
Internal
communication
error
Protective board
(manager board) is
triggered for a long
time 1
Protective board
(manager board) is
time 2
Broken TA wire
TA failure
Panel
communication
error
The 24V positive power source of optocouplers

fails, the DEVICE BLOCKING and OTHER
ALARM signals are issued and the protection is not
blocked.
The communication between the protective board

and manger board fails, the OTHER ALARM
signals are issued and the protection is not blocked.
The DSP1 pickup elements of the protective boards
(manger boards) are triggered for a long time
(differential busbar protection is triggered for a long
time), the OTHER ALARM signals are issued and
the protection is not blocked
(manager boards) are triggered for a long time (the
failure protection is triggered for a long time), the
OTHER ALARM signals are issued and the failure
protection is blocked
The CT secondary circuit is broken, a BROKEN
WIRE alarm is generated and the differential busbar
protection is blocked or not blocked depending on
the setting.
CT secondary circuits fails, a TA FAILURE alarm is
generated and the differential busbar protection is
not blocked.
The communication between the panel CPU and
protective board's CPU fails, the OTHER ALARM
Optocoupler
The 24V positive power source of optocouplers fail,
the DEVICE BLOCKING and OTHER ALARM
Internal
communication
error
The communication between the protective board

and manger board fails, the OTHER ALARM
- 132 -
Remedial Method
the manufacturer.
After the set value area
number or system
parameter setpoint is set,
the set values for
differential busbar
protection and failure
protection must be re-set.
Check that optocoupler
power source of power
source boards and
isolated power source of
digital I/O boards are
correctly wired.
Check that the
communication cable is
correctly connected
between the protective
board and manager
board.
Check secondary circuits
for wiring (including TA
polarity)

polarity) and failure
contacts
the protection and check
TA secondary circuits .
Check the TAs secondary

circuits.
Check that the
correctly connected
between the panel and
protective board.
Check that optocoupler
power source of power
source boards and
isolated power source of
digital I/O boards are
correctly wired.
Check that the
correctly connected
between the protective
board and manager
board.
Self-test
Information
Protective board
(manager board)
time 1
Protective board
(manager board)
time 2
Broken TA wire
TA failure
Panel
communication
error
Meaning
Remedial Method

(manager boards) are triggered for a long time
(differential busbar protection is triggered for a long
time), the OTHER ALARM signals are issued and
the protection is not blocked
(manager boards) are triggered for a long time (the
failure protection is triggered for a long time), the
OTHER ALARM signals are issued and the failure
protection is blocked
The PT secondary circuit is broken, a BROKEN
WIRE alarm is generated and the differential busbar
protection is blocked or not blocked depending on
the setting.
CT secondary circuits fails, a TA FAILURE alarm is
generated and the differential busbar protection is
not blocked.

polarity)
The communication between the panel CPU and

protective board's CPU fails, the OTHER ALARM

polarity) and failure
contacts
the protection and check
TA secondary circuits.
Check the TAs secondary
circuits.
Check that the
correctly connected
between the panel and
protective board.
8.
Computer-based Step-up Substation Supervisory Control System
8.1
Functions of Computer-based step-up Substation Supervisory Control System

The 150kV step-up substation supervisory control system adopts NSC3000X system.
8.2
Main Features of NCS300UX Supervisory Control System

The system provides simple three-phase unbalance supervisory control function. The three-phase
imbalance in voltage, current and other parameters is often a sign of failure or failures. NSC300UX
is able to simplify the control and judgment course.
(1). Eliminating invalid information
(2). Automatic monitoring and recording functions.
(3). Remote control configuration
(4). The system provides many data import and export functions
(5). Alarm window processing
8.3
NSC300UX Architecture
NSC300UX SCADA/EMS architecture may be described in two regards, namely system structure
and internal module structure.
8.3.1
System Structure
The NSC300UX SCADA/EMS system is a multi-computer and dual network structure.
The dual network refers to Net A and B, which back up each other. The configuration can prevent
system collapse in case of failure of any one network, and avoid excessively heavy load on one
network.
The multi-computer system is based on one server and client model. The entire system may have
two servers and up to 40 clients. The system may be configured as load sharing or redundant mode.
If the system is configured as redundant mode, the system should be defaulted to fixed hot standby
mode. However, forced changeover is also allowable.
- 133 -
8.3.2
Main functions of computer-based supervisory control system:

Real-time data sampling and processing
Alarm processing
SOE record and PDR function
Control function (switch interlocking and AVQC strategy etc)
Online statistical calculation
Menu, table display and printing
Clock synchronization
Information exchange with remote dispatching and control centers
Communication with relaying protections
Communication with other plant-wide IEDS
Self- diagnostic and self recovery
Maintenance functions
Separate dual power switching devices are provided on each I/O measuring and control panel of bay
level equipments. When one power source unit fails, disturbance-free changeover to another power
source unit will occur. The LOCAL/REMOTE, INTELOCK/UNLOCK changeover switches as well
as manual control buttons are provided on the I/O measuring and control device. On one hand, the
I/O measuring and control device directly acquires, process and transit field data to station-level
computers. On the other hand, the I/O measuring and control device receive the commands from
station control level, judge the invalidity, detect block error and synchronization and finally execute
the commands.
150kV part: Each 150kV string is divided into three electrical units, that is to say, each
circuit-breaker is provided with one NSC681 measuring and control device to perform acquisition,
control, operation blocking and time synchronization functions. Three NSC681 of each string
constitute one panel. One NSC681 is provided for 150kV line and another NSC681 common
measuring and control device is provided.
In addition, one protection and communication manager panel is provided. Disturbance recorder and
DC kilowatt hour meter information is sent to the protection and communication manger, which is
directly connected with Ethernet
The entire bay level has three panels which are mounted in the network control relay rooms.
9.
Startup/backup Transformer Protection

The startup/ backup transformer is equipped with 2 RCS-985T and RCS-921A Zone T protections
and RCS-974AG2 non-electrical and auxiliary transformer protection. The hardware system of
RCS-985T is based on high-performance DSP chips and 32-bit CPU. Therefore, it is a real digital
transformer protection.
The RCS-985T transformer protection adopts master/salve solution and is able to perform all
electric protection required by a transformer. It is suitable for the protection of transformers, such as
multi-branch startup/backup transformers, auxiliary transformers and main transformers.
- 134 -
9.1
Protective functions of 1RCS-985T
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9.2
Protective functions
Variable slope ratio differential protection (up to
7 sides)
Differential instantaneous tripping protection
No.
10
Protective functions
Overload alarm
11
Composite-voltage overcurrent protection for

HV side
HV side zero-sequence (directional) overcurrent
protection
Gap overcurrent protection for HV side
Gap overvoltage protection for HV side
Composite-voltage overcurrent protection for
LV-side branch
(up to 6 branches)
Zero-sequence overcurrent protection for
branches
Incomplete-phase operation
12
Zero-sequence voltage alarm for

branches
Cooling fan start
13
Voltage regulation blocked
14
15
16
Three-phase discrepancy alarm

Broken TV judgment
Broken TA judgment
17
Transformer over-excitation
protection
Zero-sequence differential
protection (HV side, branch
limited earth protection)
18
Other functions
No.
1
2
Other functions
4 RS-485 communication ports
2 multiplex optical fiber interfaces
No.
6
7
1 commissioning port
IEC870-5-103 communication protocol
LFP communication protocol
10
Other functions
MODBUS communication protocol
CPU board: protection and disturbance
recorder function
MON board: 4s (or 8s) continuous
Disturbance recorder function
Printing: set values, message and
waveform in Chinese
Display: set values and message
Notes: refer to the line protection for the RCS-924A Zone T protection, and to the
generator-transformer unit protection for RCS-974AG2 non-electrical and auxiliary transformer
protection.
10
Rapid Auxiliary Power Change-over Device

Section 31, 32 and 33A/B of 6kV auxiliary power supply system are provided with three panels and
six MFC20003A microprocessor-based rapid auxiliary power changeover device manufactured by
Wiscom Electrical Co., Ltd. MFC20003A adopts 4U housings, 32-bit microprocessors, DSP
structure and back plane structure and bus back plates. There is not tie wires. A 320240 dot matrix
color LCD is mounted on the device panel. Therefore, technical performance, reliability and MMI
friendliness are greatly improved.
10.1
Main Features of the Device

The device has complete changeover functions, including manual changeover, parallel changeover,
simultaneous changeover and tandem changeover. The parallel changeover is further divided into
automatic and semi-automatic changeover. The automatic changeover includes emergency
changeover and abnormal changeover, tandem changeover and simultaneous changeover. The
changeover mode includes rapid changeover, synchronized changeover, residual voltage changeover
and delayed changeover, Constant leading time and constant leading phase angle may be chosen for
synchronized capturing changeover.
The device is able to operate separately and turn on or off auxiliary power supply systems in
- 135 -
synchronized or voltage-free way.

It is suitable for cold and hot standby power source modes. It can be used for auxiliary power
changeover in which standby power source is in cold or hot standby modes.
10.2
Device Software
MFC2000-3A quick changeover device adopts dual CPU system. The software is composed of two
parts which are executed by a master CPU and slave CPU respectively.
Software for master CPU: include digital input detecting, changeover action, output, test, signal and
self-testing modules as well as DSP sampling and frequency &phase angle calculation programs.
Slave CPU software: including LCD, printing, communication and GPS time synchronizing
modules.
10.3
Main Technical Specification

Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature: -10 to +55;
Relative humidity: 5%90% (non condensing)
Atmospheric pressure: 80110kPa
DC power supply:
Rated voltage: DC220V/DC110V or AC220V
Allowable variation: -20%+10%
Ripple coefficient: no more than 5%
Rated AC Input
AC current: 5A
AC voltage: 100V or 57.7V
Frequency: 50Hz
Quick changeover time
(1). Simultaneous emergent changeover: 10 msuser-set delay time +standby circuit-breaker
closing time (to be calculated from the closure of external protective pickup contact to the closure of
standby circuit-breaker)
(2). Tandem emergent changeover: 10 mstripping time of operating circuit-breakers +standby
circuit-breaker closing time (to be calculated from the closure of external protective pickup contacts
to the closure of standby circuit-breakers)
10.4
Monitoring and Display function

The LCD displays the following parameters or states:
1) Three-phase voltage of auxiliary power busbar: Ua, Ub and Uc or Uab, Ubc and Uca
2) Operating power voltage Ugz (any one phase voltage or any one line voltage at plant
transformer branch or generator terminals)
3) Standby power voltage Ubz (any one phase voltage or any one line voltage on HV or LV sides
of standby transformers)
4) Frequency of station busbar voltage Ua (or Uab) and standby power voltage (Ugz or Uby)
5) Frequency difference between station busbar voltage Ua (or Uab) and standby power voltage
(Ugz or Uby)
6) Phase difference between station busbar voltage Ua (or Uab) and standby power voltage (Ugz
- 136 -
or Uby)
7) Three-phase current Igz of operating branches (any phase current or line current)
8) Three-phase current Ia, Ib and Ic of standby branches.
9) Status of operating circuit-breakers, backup circuit-breakers and station busbar PTs isolator.
10.5
10)
All set parameters
11)
Status of all external links and internal soft links
Changeover function
10.5.1
Normal changeover
Normal changeover is manually initiated from control desks, DCS systems or device panels.
Normal changeover is bidirectional, that is to say, the operational (standby) power source may be
changed over to the standby (operational) power source.
There are the following several normal changeover modes:
10.5.2
Parallel changeover
(1). Parallel changeover, automatic

It is manually initiated. If the conditions for parallel changeover are met, the device will firstly close
the standby (operational) circuit-breakers and then trip the operational (standby) circuit-breakers
after a delay time. If the standby (operational) circuit-breaker, which has just been closed, is tripped
within the delay time, the device will not continue to trip the operational (standby) circuit-breaker. If
the conditions are not met after changeover initiation, the device will block signal sending and wait
for manual resetting.
(2). Parallel changeover, semi-automatic
It is manually initiated. If the conditions for parallel changeover are met, the device will close the
standby (operational) circuit-breakers and the operational (standby) circuit-breakers will be
manually operated. If operators dont trip the operational (standby) circuit-breaker within the preset
time, the device will generate an alarm so as to prevent two power sources from being parallel
connected for a long time. If the conditions are not met after changeover initiation, the device will
block signal sending and wait for manual resetting.
10.5.3
Normal tandem changeover
It is manually initiated. A command to trip the operational (standby) circuit-breaker will be firstly
issued. After confirming that the operational (standby) circuit-breaker has been tripped and the
changeover conditions are met, close the standby (operational) circuit-breakers. Normal changeover
is used for two power source units with a large intrinsic phase difference between difference
frequency system or common frequency systems. This mode may be achieved in four ways, rapid
changeover, synch capture, residual voltage and long delay time. If rapid changeover fails, the
device will automatically enter synch capture, residual voltage and long delay time status.
10.5.4
Normal simultaneous changeover
Normal simultaneous changeover is manually initiated and a tripping command and closing
command will be simultaneously issued. Because the closing time is generally longer than the
opening time, a delay time may be set before issuing closing commands so that circuit-breaker
opening is performed earlier than circuit-breaker closing. It is applicable to changeover between
common and differential frequency systems. This mode may be achieved in four ways, rapid
changeover, synch capture, residual voltage and long delay time. If rapid changeover fails, the
device will automatically enter synch capture, residual voltage and long delay time status.
10.5.5
Emergency changeover
Emergency changeover is initiated by a protective output and the operational power source is
- 137 -
changed over to the standby power source.

There are two emergency changeover ways:
Emergency tandem changeover
It is initiated by a protection. The operational power circuit-breaker is firstly tripped. After
confirming that the operational circuit-breaker has been tripped and the changeover conditions are
met, close the standby power circuit-breaker.
There are four ways used to perform tandem changeover, rapid changeover, synch capture, residual
voltage and long delay time. If rapid changeover fails, the device will automatically enter synch
capture, residual voltage and long delay time status
Emergency simultaneous changeover
It is initiated by a protection. Firstly issue a command to trip operational power circuit-breaker.
When the changeover conditions are met (or after a preset delay time), a command is issued to close
the standby power circuit-breaker. There are four ways used to perform emergency changeover,
rapid changeover, synch capture, residual voltage and long delay time. If rapid changeover fails, the
device will automatically enter synch capture, residual voltage and long delay time status
10.5.6
Abnormal changeover
In case a abnormal condition is detected by a device, abnormal changeover is automatically initiated

and the operational power source is changed over to the standby power source.
Abnormal conditions include the following two conditions:
Auxiliary power busbar loss of voltage
When three-phase voltage of auxiliary power busbar is lower than a set value and the current is
equal to or smaller than a set value for more than a set delay time, the device will perform tandem or
simultaneous changeover depending on chosen modes.
Changeover ways: rapid changeover, synch capture, residual voltage and long delay time
Incorrect operational power circuit-breaker tripping
If the operational power circuit-breaker is incorrectly tripped due to various reasons (including
incorrect operation and operating mechanism failure), the device will close the standby power
circuit-breaker provided that the changeover conditions are met.
Changeover ways: rapid changeover, synch capture, residual voltage and long delay time. The
device provides auxiliary current judgment functions
10.6
Load Reduction in case of Low Voltage

The load reduction for low voltage is effective only when the device is performing changeover.
Temporary power failure during changeover will cause the drop in auxiliary power busbar voltage
and motor speed. Whether motor groups can successfully start up after closing standby power
circuit-breakers mainly depend on the auxiliary power busbar voltage. In this case, some common
auxiliaries may be cut off, This is advantageous to self-starting of key auxiliaries. The device may
have 2-section load reduction output and a delay time may be set for the two sections respectively.
10.7
Alarm block and failure processing function
- 138 -
As shown in the figure, changeover blocking is a general block status. In case of any of device
failure, abnormal circuit-breaker position, protection blocking, broken PT, device actuation, loss of
power blocking, disabling hard link changeover, disabling soft link changeover and disabling all
changeover, the device will be in changeover blocked state and therefore it is impossible to perform
changeover.
The above blocking reasons may be divided into two major categories: (1) block which can be
automatically reset; (2) blocks which can not be automatically reset. The former refers to that the
device can be in normal state after the block conditions disappear. The latter refers to that the device
returns to the normal operating state after the block conditions disappear and the device is manually
reset. The block modes are described in detail below
(1). Blocking which can be automatically reset
Blocking in case standby power failure: When the control word Blocking in case of Standby Power
Failure is ON and the standby power voltage is smaller than the set "Lower Voltage Limit", the
device will be blocked. Notes: if the control word is OFF and the standby power voltage is smaller
than the set lower limit, the changeover will not be blocked and only residual voltage changeover or
changeover with a long delay may be performed.
Hard changeover link OFF: When the digital input Changeover ON/OFF contact is in closed state,
the changeover functions will be blocked.
Soft changeover link OFF: When the control word Changeover ON/OFF is set to OFF, the
changeover functions will be blocked.
All changeover modes are OFF: when the control words Fast Changeover, Synch Capture
Leading Phase Angle, Synch Capture Leading Time, Residual Voltage Changeover and
Changeover with a Long Delay are OFF, the changeover will be blocked.
(2). Blocking which can not be automatically reset
Device failure: When a failure is detected during self-testing course, the changeover function will be
blocked.
Abnormal circuit-breaker position: If the operational and standby circuit-breakers are not consistent
(both circuit-breakers are closed or opened), or the device considers circuit-breaker positions as
abnormal when the PT isolator is opened, the changeover function will be blocked.
Protective blocking: When the external digital input Protective Blocking is ON, the changeover
- 139 -
functions will be blocked.

Broken PT: The fast changeover device judge a broken PT wire by analyzing voltage. If a PT wire is
broken, the fast changeover functions will be blocked.
Device operation: When the device has been actuated, the changeover function will be blocked. The
device may return to the normal operation only after being manually reset.
10.8
Abnormal Circuit-breaker Positions (Position Blocking/Decoupling)

One of necessary conditions for changeover actuation is that one of the operational and standby
circuit-breakers is closed and another is opened and the PTs isolator must be in closed position. If
the condition is not met (except for incorrect tripping), the device will block its output, issue
Device Blocked signal to the CCR and wait for resetting.
If a circuit-breaker fails to open or close within certain time, the device will deal with the situation
depending on changeover ways and issue blocking signals. For example, if, during simultaneous or
parallel changeover, a circuit-breaker cannot be tripped, two power sources will be parallel
connected. In this case, the device will execute decoupling function so that the circuit-breaker which
is just closed is tripped.
10.9
Device Self-test Failure

After operation, the device always perform self test on some key components, such as CPU, RAM,
EEPROM and AD. Once any abnormal condition is detected, the changeover function will be
blocked, the Device Failure signal will be sent and the device will wait for resetting. When the
CPU failures in the worst case, it is impossible to perform self test and block the device.
10.10
Protective Blocking
Changeover is blocked due to an external digital input. When certain protections (such as HV
auxiliary transformer branch overcurrent and busbar protection etc), the device blocking will be
initiated by the protective outputs so as to prevent standby power source from being connected to
failure busbar,. In this case, the device will send Protective Blocking signals and wait for resetting.
Notes: The status of waiting for resetting is an operating state and not a central control signal. Once
the device sends a Device Blocked signal, the device will be necessarily in the status of waiting
for resetting. In this case, the changeover is impossible. When the device is manually reset and the
block conditions dont exist, the device can be in operating state and the next changeover is possible.
10.11
PT Breakage
When one or two phases of auxiliary power busbar PT is broken, the device will block alarms and
be ready for resetting.
10.12
Standby Power Failure Monitoring
If the standby (operational) power source fails when the operational (standby) power source is put
into operation, it is impossible to perform changeover operation and the device will generate an
alarm and is ready for resetting.
Notes: The function may be enabled or disabled in the Mode Setting menu taking account of the
need for standby section PT maintenance. After the Changeover Blocked upon Standby Power
Failure is disabled, the device can still perform residual voltage changeover and changeover with a
long delay provided that the standby power exists.
10.13
Unblocking
All device blocking may be released except for standby power failure only after abnormal
conditions dont exist and an alarm is manually reset.
If the Changeover Blocked upon Standby Power Failure is enabled and standby voltage loss is
detected, the device will block changeover. When the standby voltage is recovered, the device will
release blocking without the need for manual resetting.
- 140 -
10.14
Protection Speedup Functions
When the device initiates any changeover, it will output a closed contact signal so that the branch
protection can be speeded up.
10.15
10.15.1
Daily Maintenance
Alarm window or DCS signal
When the auxiliary power supply system and device are in normal operation, the alarm windows
will not turn on. When they malfunction, one or more alarm windows will turn on. This condition
should be dealt with case by case. Then, press the RESET button to reset alarm windows.
Device power failure: Check the DC power voltage of the device and check whether the DC fuse of
the rapid changeover cabinets is in good order, the air circuit-breaker on cabinet rear panel is closed,
and the power module switch is opened. If they are in order, check the +5, +15, -15 and +24V lamps
on power module front panels to confirm which circuit failures. If a problem exists inside the device
(including power modules), immediately deal with it or notify maintenance personnel.
Changeover blocked. This is a general signal indicating that the changeover is blocked due to a
certain cause. The cause should be investigated taking account of the Status Report menu on other
alarm windows or LCD. The possible causes include:
Changeover in progress. The device changeover is in progress.
PT breakage. It indicates that one or two phase voltage input to the device is too low due to PT
breakage.
Protective blocking. It indicates that the device receives external "Protective Blocking command,
namely the "Protective Blocking contact was closed. Check the protections.
Blocking initiated by standby power failure. When the blocking function is enabled and the standby
power fails, the changeover functions will be blocked.
Device failure: The alarm window indicates that the device detects a failure in a major component
during self test. Immediately inform the manufacturer.
Abnormal circuit-breaker position. When the PT isolator is not closed and the position is blocked,
the alarm window will turn on.
Changeover disabled. It indicates that the changeover functions are manually disabled.
Daily panel check
When the device is in normal operation, only one of the Operational Power lamp or Standby Power
lamp remains On, the Device Run lamp is blinking, the Remote Operation lamp remains On and the
Changeover Operation lamp and Blocking lamp remain Off.
Measurement indication: The indicated voltage, current, frequency, frequency difference, phase
difference and circuit-breaker positions should be consistent with the actual states.
Mode setting: All mode setting should be in accordance with the setting.
Setpoint: All set values should be consistent with the setpoint.
Abnormal event: no abnormal event currently occurs.
Status report: no abnormal state
Status bar: the clock can be displayed, the operating mode is consistent with the setting value and no
blocking icon is displayed.
10.16
Failure Analysis
When the rapid auxiliary power changeover device is in normal operation, there is not any alarm
signal. Once an alarm is active, immediately deal with it or notify maintenance personnel. After
treatment, press the RESET button so as to put the device into operation.
- 141 -
Device power failure: Check that the DC power supply is in order;

Device blocked: it is a general signal indicating that the device is blocked due to a reason, which
should be investigate taking account of other signals.
Changeover over: indicating that the changeover is successfully completed.
PT breakage. It indicates that one or two phase voltage input to the device is too low. Immediately
notify maintenance personnel.
Protective blocking: indicating that the device receives a Protective Blocking command. Check
the protection.
Standby power failure: When the blocking function is enabled and the standby power fails, the
changeover functions will be blocked.
Device failure: indicating that the device detects a failure in a major component during self test.
Immediately inform maintenance personnel and contact the manufacturer.
Abnormal circuit-breaker position: indicating that the external input contact is incorrect.
Immediately notify maintenance personnel.
10.17 Selection of 6kV Auxiliary Power Supply System Changeover Mode for #31, #32 and #33
Units
Simultaneous changeover is adopted for normal changeover of 6kV busbar for #31, 32 and 33 units.
A manual starting button, remote changeover mode selective button, device blocking setting button,
output blocking setting button and remote reset button are provided in the DCS. Local changeover
may be performed on the rapid changeover panel. The fast changeover device must be reset after
each actuation so as to put it into standby state and check any possible alarms. If a abnormal
condition is found, contact maintenance personnel.
Normal changeover is bidirectional, that is to say, the operational (standby) power source may be
changed over to the standby (operational) power source. Normal simultaneous changeover is
adopted for 6kV auxiliary power supply system for #31, 32 and 33 units.
It is manually initiated. A command is firstly issued to trip the operational (standby) circuit-breaker.
When the changeover conditions are met, a command is issued to close the standby (operational)
circuit-breaker. This will ensure that a auxiliary power circuit-breaker is closed after another
circuit-breaker is opened. A closing delay time may be set.
There are four conditions for normal simultaneous changeover, rapid changeover, synch capture,
residual voltage and changeover with a long delay. If rapid changeover fails, synch capture, residual
voltage changeover and changeover with a long delay will be automatically performed.
11 6kV Auxiliary Power Supply System Protection and Automatic Device

6kV system protection and automatic device is composed of Series WDZ400 microprocessor-based
automation protection and devices manufactured by Jiangsu Jinzhi Electrical Co., Ltd. WDZ430
motor protection and control device, WDZ431 differential protection and WDZ410 line protection
and control device and WDZ440 transformer protection and control device are used in the power
plant.
11.1 Application of Series WDZ4OO Microprocessor-based protection in the plant
Equipments
6kV motor with a capacity up to 2000kW
6kV motor above 2000kW
6kV feeder switch cabinet
HV side switch cabinet for 6kV auxiliary transformer
6kV harmonic cancellation device
6kV motor protection and communication manager
- 142 -
Model
WDZ430
WDZ431WDZ430
WDZ410
WDZ440
WXZ196
ECM5906
6kV PT protection cabinet
WDZ491
11.2 WDZ-430EX Motor Protection and Control Device

WDZ-430EX motor protection and control device (the Device) is mainly used to protect and control
large-or medium-sized three-phase asynchronous motors. For extra large-sized motors (2000kW and
higher, or the main protection sensitivity does not pass verification), WDZ-431EX differential motor
protection should be mounted. The device may be provided with separate operating circuits and
anti-bounce circuits and is suitable for use with motor circuits with different outputs.
11.2.1
Main protective functions:

Current instantaneous tripping protection (reverse power block)
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection (for section I)
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection (for section II)
Earth failure protection
Overheating protection
Restart inhibition protection
Locked rotor protection
Long starting time protection
Positive-sequence over-current protection
Overload protection
Under-voltage protection
PT breakage alarm
Output blocking in case of a large current in FC circuit
Fuse protection
Separate operating circuit and anti-bounce circuit (optional)
Disturbance record and motor starting process record
11.2.2
Main measurement and control functions

10-way remote digital input acquisition, internal remote signals and emergency remote
signal
Remote circuit-breaker tripping and closing
Remote measurement: three-phase voltage, three-phase current, P, Q, power factor and
frequency
2-way impulse input which facilitate meter recording
A high-accuracy smart watt hour meter with active impulse output is built in the device and
external watt hour meter is not required (optional)
1-way 4-20mA analog output which replace transmitters and is used as a measuring port
with DCS (optional)
Motor start information and start counts
11.2.3
Operation and control functions
The operating circuits are protected against bouncing and a appropriate number of position contacts
are provided. The device is able to block tripping and closing functions to suit to circuit-breakers
having different operating mechanisms (such as hydraulic, pneumatic, energy storage by motor or
spring). Changeover between local/remote controls can be performed upon the users demand. The
device has 12-way digital input and 8-way digital output circuits and soft or hard logic interlock
- 143 -
control may be performed.

11.2.4
Remote functions
Many communication ports: RS485, CAN, Ethernet ports, which support dual net and remote
measurement, remote signal, remote control and remote adjustment.
11.2.5
a)
Daily maintenance
Device startup
Turn of the DC power source. The RUN/COMMISSIONING lamp flashes and other lamps remain
off.
Check the device setting against the setpoint list;
Check that the voltage and current inputs are correctly wired.
b)
Device operation
The RUN/COMMISSIONING lamp flashed;

The current and voltage indicated on the device panel should be equal to their actual values;
The digital input status should be identical to the actual status.
c)
Protection action signal and report
If the motors are tripped, the device output lamp will turn on and remain on, an alarm will be
generated and displayed on the screen. If an abnormal operating condition caused protection action,
an alarm will be generated and displayed on the screen. In case of overload or earth failures, the
corresponding lamps will turn on. All of the above situations may be printed out via communication
ports.
When an alarm is active, the output lamp will turn on and the protective functions are still effective.
Analyze the causes of the problems. After the cause is eliminated, press the RESET button to clear
alarms.
11.3 WDZ-431 EX Motor Differential Protection
WDZ-431EX differential motor protection (hereinafter referred to as the device) is mainly used as
differential protection for large-sized three-phase asynchronous motors (2000kW or higher, or the
sensitivity of main protection is unacceptable) and constitutes a complete motor protection together
with WDZ-430EX general motor protection.
11.3.1
Main protective functions (each protective function may be enabled or disabled and operating
circuits may be chosen according to the actual demands):
Differential instantaneous tripping protection
Differential ratio protection for respective phase
Setpoint multiplication
Differential blocking and alarm in case of CT breakage
Disturbance recorder
11.3.2
Auxiliary functions
1 If a failure is not cleared after protection action, other protections will also be triggered
provided that the conditions are met.
2 If a failure occurs when the protection is actuated and not reset, the protection can also be
actuated. That is to say, the protection can be actuated several times.
3 The device is able to record various information about operation of the device and motors,
including:
- 144 -
64 protective SOE events

256 remote position change SOE events
16 self-diagnostic events
4 The disturbance recorder is able to record all analog and digital signals associated with one
latest failure, including:
Data during two cycles before failures, four cycles after tripping and in failure. The max. Recording
time is 10s.
11.4 WDZ-410EX Line Protection and Control Device
WDZ-410EX line protection and control device (hereinafter referred to as the device) is mainly used
to protect and control feeders, branches or busbar sections. A separate operating and anti-bounce
circuit may be provided for the device.
11.4.1
Main protective functions (each protective function may be enabled or disabled and operating
Current instantaneous tripping protection (overcurrent section I blocking in case of low
voltage)
Current instantaneous tripping protection with a delay (overcurrent section II blocking in
case of low voltage)
Overcurrent protection (overcurrent section III)
Earth failure protection (zero-sequence overcurrent protection)
Overload protection
Post-acceleration protection
11.4.2 Main measurement and control functions (each digital I/O may be enabled or disabled and
operating circuits may be chosen according to the actual demands):
10-way remote digital input acquisition, internal remote signals and emergency remote
signal
Remote measurement: three-phase voltage, three-phase current, P, Q, power factor and
frequency
A high-accuracy smart watt hour meter with active impulse output is built in the device and
external watt hour meter is not required (optional)
1-way 4-20mA analog output which replace transmitters and is used as a measuring port
with DCS (optional)
11.5 WDZ-440EX Transformer Protection and Control Device
WDZ-440EX LV transformer protection and control device is mainly used to protect and control LV
transformers (10KV/380V or 6KV/380V). For extra large-sized LV transformers (5600kVA and
higher, or the main protection sensitivity is unacceptable), WDZ-441EX LV transformer differential
protection should be mounted. The device may be provided with separate operating circuits and
anti-bounce circuits and is suitable for use with transformer circuits with different outputs.
11.5.1 Main protective functions (each protective function may be enabled or disabled and operating
- 145 -
Current instantaneous tripping protection for HV side

Current instantaneous tripping protection for HV side, with a delay
HV side overcurrent protection
HV side overload protection (with regard to time characteristics, the definite time, normal
inverse time, very reverse time or extraordinary reverse time may be chosen)
V side negative-sequence overcurrent section I protection
HV side negative-sequence overcurrent section II protection
HV side earth failure protection (definite time zero-sequence overcurrent protection)
LV side zero-sequence overcurrent protection (with regard to time characteristics, the
definite time, normal inverse time, very reverse time or extraordinary reverse time
may be chosen)
Non-electrical protection (digital input)
Output blocking in case of a large current in FC circuit
Fuse protection
11.5.2 As a smart front-end, it has the following main measurement and control functions (each digital
I/O may be enabled or disabled and operating circuits may be chosen according to the actual
demands):
10-way remote digital input acquisition, internal remote signals and emergency remote signal
Remote measurement: three-phase voltage, three-phase current, P, Q, power factor and frequency
A high-accuracy smart watt hour meter is built in the device and external watt hour meter is not
required (optional)
1-way 4-20mA analog output which replace transmitters and is used as a measuring port with DCS
(optional)
12 380V Auxiliary Power Supply System Protection and Control Device

12.1 Smart Controller
The smart controller is a core of Series RMW1 smart frame-type circuit-breakers and the control
part of overload protection, short-circuit protection, earth failure protection and other protections.
The core of controllers is a 16-bit high-speed microprocessor. The mechanical actuator is a magnetic
flux transducer which is independent from under-voltage and shunt release. Normally, a permanent
magnet attracts the core and the transducer is in closed state. When the controller issues a actuation
command, the reversing field will overcome the magnetic flux of the permanent magnet, the return
spring opens the moving core, the magnetic flux transducer is opened and therefore the
circuit-breaker is opened.
Meaning of parameter symbols on the panel:
In
Ir1, Ir2, Ir3, Ir4
Tc1, Tc2, T, TG, Tl, Ts
1, 2, 3, N
Hz, kW, V
Rated current of circuit-breaker

Delayed tripping current (including long and short delay time),
instantaneous tripping current and earth failure current
Set Load 1, Load 2, unbalance, earth, long delay time and short delay
Phase A, B, C and N
Frequency, power and voltage
- 146 -
cos
L1, L2, L3, G
, A/kA, s, I2t
Ic1, Ic2
If
L, S, I
T
ER1ER4
12.2
Power factor
Indicating Phase A current, Phase B current, Phase C current and earth
current
Percentage, ampere /kilo ampere, second, definite time or reverse time
Set current for load monitor 1 and 2
Three-phase (A, B and C) current unbalance rate
Set earth failure current
Set long delay time, short delay time and transient time
Self-diagnostics
Self-diagnostic error code
Smart MCC Control12.2.1 Device
and Protection
12.2.1 Device function

The device is able to measure IA, IB, IC, I0, positive-sequence, negative-sequence, thermal state
and other physical quantity.
Remote and local control can be performed.
Programmable interlock logic
Self-start after voltage recovery
Thermal protection and restart inhibition protection
Earth failure protection
12.2.2 Device panel
1)
LED windows
A 6-digit LED window indicates motor current and thermal state. The motor thermal state is
indicated in percentage. When the motor attains thermal balance state, the value is zero. When the
value is 100, the motor has attained the set overheating state and the thermal protection will be
initiated.
2)
Indicating lamp
RUN remains On when the motor is in operation (red)

STOP remains On when the motor stops (Green)
Overheated remains On after the overheating protection is actuated; and turns Off when
resetting failures
EARTH remains On after the earth failure protection is actuated; and turns Off when
resetting failures
INTERLOCK ON when the standby motors are started up, the lamp flashes (red) to prompt
operators to push the OPERATIONALSTANDBY changeover switch to OPERATIONAL.
Device failure remains on (red) when the device failures, and turns off when the device is in
order.
COMMUNICATION The identification on the panel is COMMUNICAITON when the
device is in ModBus communication mode. When the device is in normal communication, the lamp
flashes (red). The identification on the panel is PB FAILURE when the device is in ProfiBus
communication mode. When the device is in normal communication, the lamp turns off. When the
communication fails, the lamp turns on (red).
3)
Touch keypad
Keys: +, , SELECTION, ACK, CANCEL and RESET.

+ and keys are used to modify set values;
- 147 -
The SELECTION key is used to select among setting values.

The ACK and CANCEL key is used to confirm and cancel a operation.
The RESET key is used to re-start the device.
In addition, the CANCEL key may be used to reset alarms. When a motor failure occurs, the failure
signal will be held. It is possible to restore the normal operation of motors only after the failure
signals are reset. The failure signals may also be reset using programmable input or Fieldbus
communication.
4)
Pushbutton
There are local control pushbuttons on the device panels.

Red motor START pushbutton
Green motor STOP pushbutton
The device controlling reversible motors (such as MKB-200) has two START pushbuttons, START
A and START B. Use START A pushbutton to run the motors in normal direction and use START B
pushbutton to reverse the direction of rotation.
5)
OPERATIONAL /STANDBY selective switch
There is an OPERATIONAL/STANDBY selective switch on the panel. Use the switch to set the
motor to the operational or standby state. When some of two or more motors are used as the
operational ones and another motors are used as standby, the selective switch must be used.
6)
REMOTE/LOCAL selective switch
There is a LOCAL/REMOTE selective switch on the panel. The switch is used to choose between
local and remote control. When the switch is in LOCAL position, the control buttons on the panel
can be used to control motors and the remote control (refer to external control buttons connected
with device terminals and Fieldbus-based control functions, not including programmable input
interlock functions) is ineffective. When the switch is in the REMOTE position, the device can be
remotely controlled (refer to external control buttons connected with device terminals and
Fieldbus-based control functions) and the control buttons on the panel is ineffective.
13 Explanation of Some Operations for ECS System (Electrical Control System) of the
DCS
13.1
Scope
The ECS concerns the operation of rapid auxiliary power changeover device, microprocessor-based
synchronizer as well as generator startup and shutdown. The operation menus provide a MMI for
operators.
The menu is divided into pop-up menus (which pop up when operators click devices on DAS menu)
and disabling menus.
13.2
Typical Operation
13.2.1 Rapid changeover device

Click DEV/QUIT for putting the quick switching device into operation
Click RESET for resetting the quick switching device
Click PAR or SEQ for selecting the quick switching mode as parallel or sequence.
Click ACTIV for executing the quick switching
Click RESET for resetting the quick switching device
13.2.2 Circuit breaker
An operation panel of common circuit-breakers is composed of CLOSING, OPENING, ACK and
- 148 -
failure indication buttons. When clicking the CLOSING or OPENING button, the ACK button will
spear on the screen. After clicking the ACK button, the system will send a 2s short pulse to operate
the circuit-breakers and the ACK button will be highlighted. If the opening or closing conditions are
met, the box under the CLOSING or OPENING buttons will turn red. If a failure exists, the box will
turn yellow. If no failure exists, the box will turn grey.
13.2.3 Automatic quasi-synchronizer
The operation panel is composed of buttons of ENGAGE, RESET, CHOOSE GS101/GS102
and QUIT.
Click RESET for resetting the synchronizing device.
Click GS101/GS102 for choosing the synchronizing object.
Click ENGAGE for engaging and starting the synchronizing device, synchronized with the system
of the synchronization conditions are met.
Click QUIT for stopping the automatic quasi-synchronizer
13.2.4 Generator side/interrupting circuit-breaker (150KV unit main/bypass circuit-breaker)
Log in the NCS operating interface, select the GS101/GS102 switch to execute the trip. After the
rechecking of the NCS system is normal, execute the tripping order. Check and make sure the
tripping position and the messages are normal.
13.2.5 Generator AVR
There are 4 buttons, EXCITATION INCREASE/DECREASE, EXCITAITON ON/OFF,
OPERATING MODE and PSS buttons, on the flow diagram. After clicking the EXCITAITON
ON/OFF buttons, the ACK button will appear on the screen. After clicking the ACK button, the
system will send a 2s short pulse and the ACK button will be highlighted. After clicking other
buttons, the system will directly send pulses. After clicking the CONSTANT GENERATOR
TERMINAL VOLTAGE on the OPERATING MODE SELECTION, the constant generator terminal
voltage mode will take effect. After then, the button will become CONSTANT GENERATOR
VOLTAGE OPERATION OVER. After clicking it, the operating mode will stop.
13.2.6 Startup and shutdown sequence for generator and diesel-engine generator
Click the START button to start program control.
The current program control sequences will be highlighted on the panel.
Observe the corresponding conditions, status and equipment actions on the panel. If certain step
need be confirmed by operators, the ACK button will appear on the panel. Click the ACK button to
confirm the operation.
If necessary, press the ESC button to exit program control.
If a step has timed out, the system will automatically exit program control.
There is a side/middle circuit-breaker selective button in the generator starting process. Click the
SELECT Q 5022 or QF5021 to select circuit-breakers. Then, a ACK button will appear on the panel.
Click it to confirm the choice.
There is a shutdown mode selective button in the generator shutdown program. Click the CLOSING
MSV or CUTTING 3DL button to select shutdown modes.
13.2.7 Equipment operation inhibition
When equipments are maintained or locally operated, prevent operators from sending operation
commands from the CRT. For this purpose, a Operation Inhibition function is provided for the
system. Operation inhibition may only be completed on the OPERATON INHIBITION MENU.
After clicking certain equipment from the menu, a corresponding OPERATION INHIBITION
manipulator will pop up. Click YES to inhibit equipment operation. After then, the manipulator of
- 149 -
this equipment can not pop up on the flow diagram. Click NO to release operation inhibition. In this
case, the operation inhibition lamp will turn grey.
13.3
DCS System Failure
13.1.1 Phenomenon
The real-time parameter refresh failure;
Closed-loop controller failure, regulating property deterioration;
Divergent regulating property;
Controller actuator failure.
13.1.2 Solution
If operators are uncertain how to deal with DCS failures or a failure has seriously endanger the safe
operation of the units, never sustain unit operation, but immediately shut down the generators, steam
turbine and boiler using hard-wired manual panels;
In case all operator stations failure ("black screen" or crash occur in all host computers),
immediately shut down the units.
If some operator stations failure, the available operator stations should continue to accomplish
supervisory control (stop any major operation) and rapidly eliminate failures. If impossible to clear
failures, operators should deal with the situation depending on the current operating conditions.
When some operator stations failure and it is impossible to eliminate such failures, shut down the
generators after obtaining the approval from dispatchers.
When the regulating circuit controller or power supply fails, change over operating mode from auto
to manual, sustain unit operation, rapidly deal with system failures and take appropriate actions
according to the specific situations.
- 150 -

Electrical Operation Manual Handbook

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Electrical Operation Manual Handbook

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Electrical Operation Manual